Home

Ricoh BIZWORKS 106 User's Manual

1. 78 COPYING 5 Make sure the upper tray extension is pulled out Start Press C to perform the copy opera tion Note e If your original jams while being fed into Stfop the ADF press Q to cancel the opera tion See page 93 for how to clear the jam e We recommend you use Text mode when copying with the ADF H Note We recommend you copy photo originals from the exposure glass for best results O riginals that do not meet the following requirements can cause paper misfeeds and even damage the machine E Requirements Thickness 0 05mm to 0 2mm 0 002 to 0 08 Weight 60 to 90 g m 161b to 24lb Clear markings Markings on the originals must be clear to be read correctly Uniform page size All pages should be the same size Page condition Avoid using originals that are bent curled damaged or stapled and originals printed on coated paper carbon paper or photographic paper Z gt a O O Te COPYING sorting Output T he following example shows how output is affected by turning sorting on and off Sort On 5 Fk Important The sort operation requires scanning of all your originals into memory before starting the copy operation The number of originals that can be scanned at one time depends on how much memory you have installed Refer to page 23 for de tails on increasing memory capacity Sort Copying 1 Set the originals on the ADE GH Note Ref
2. ceececseecsteeseesseee 7 COMMECUOE anrr tater ttise act 16 COPY OPT AO ea cece tereniceaes eeu ane 29 Corner SUIGES sisi seslvnecerssdastescoddeaedln dens 17 19 Daily maintenan e eneen 96 Date arid UUM 292 saeco a e 38 Densi KO Vicomonsannd ste apanscuanncmneaagste scien xiii JE modema ENR ROY om 34 D see asoscoatonsann canasteatitnadatuahnsamminten xii Document mides ssis aeons X Document output tray coos scace Sell Ue ase ans xi MAST AIT a 5 112 Economy mode sssssssssssssssssseeeeteeeseessssssssssseses 108 Economy mode Clear modes key 0 c00008 xii Economy mode indicator xii PRAT CCV Met eee t scent carseiatttthan xiii FLAT SUI CIN in na na uaeseeeeenaes 33 Entering numbers se vecsctssvisisnesonosipordartevraaessnwes 30 BUC TU AN o a tetas coed esl ereenteatit 43 BMC TNS TONES a 43 VEL ODES 22 ects crue OERE 14 ETTO MESSAGES sssini 86 POREO e ee eo ioe 65 Eposu SASS eaa ansnsactelt X F BAK COPT KET oeiia Op dates xii EEEO EE EE 46 PAR OPET AUO encina heeded dence 29 PO UGG Ata nner eat catetiat 17 20 H E A EE ETE E eos AAA 101 Holp Panc Oie xii LN ACC densi oianean T Installing Document output tray s s s 5 Software drivers x 4rsa avesasssscaten ten coorsaceas 25 TONEL CASSCUG olie ta 2 Upper paper Mi oni r EN 6 Label papet enori eee na 15 WAND OU S Ea E 107 E aa A 11 17 19 Lines slow 4800 Dps cssscccsssseesssseessseesssseessssees 67 LOACING PANEL roren 11 Loading P
3. O 76 COPYING To Adjust the Image Density Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press the Density key to select the im age density Select Lighter to make the image lighter Auto Image Density LighterO Darker O Select Darker to make the image darker Auto Image Density Lighter O Darker Start Press C to perform the copy opera WA non Start P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Z gt a O O Te COPYING Setting an Original on the ADF You can load up to 10 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 Ib at atime into the Automatic D ocument Feeder AD F i Important Check to make sure that the ADF cover is securely closed before using it 1 Fan the stack of originals Never try to place more than 10 sheets of plain pa per onto the ADE 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top EJ Place the stack of originals face down on the ADF and slide the document guide against the side of the stack 2 Note The side of the original to be copied should be face down 4 Insert the stack of originals along the document guide into the ADE H Note Insert your stack of originals into the ADF until it stops If you do not push it right in the machine will not detect the stack
4. ccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaens 2 Installing Other Hardware cccssssesssessesseeeeceeececcceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaags 4 Unlockine the Scanner seen a ee e e a E EEA 4 Removing the Protective Sheet oeeeeseessesssssssssssssssssssssererrreree 4 Installing the Document Output Tray csceceesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 Installing the Upper Paper Tray sarcosine 6 Preparing the Output Tray ccccccccssssssssseseseeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 6 COmmecune toa Compite ensen E ses 7 Connecting the Telephone Line and Optional Telephone Handset 8 Purnine On the Machine cc32 a ietascns echt cuzsucsasearavie cues iacestasanntbatedebextets 9 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper and Omer Media ers teseuteta ieee vas 10 Loading Papel enseia a alent iatieresdidstisdidddes 11 Loading Plain Paper into the Upper Paper Tray eee 11 Gadi smali SIZE Papei senan e aR 13 Eoad ne Other Medii ira Cna ea Dare Mlacdiee 15 boade Envelopes eccna AN 15 Loading Transpalene ieS senene a a e a a nueasanthins 15 Eoadins Label Paper noeera henna tin eaibaate tl aanlank 15 Second Additional Printer eiea rE 16 Connectine toa Second Printe essedenriane a T 16 Paper Feed UDE Opuon gereen a 17 Paper Feed Unit Part NaMe S creena a eea ree eea E EENE 17 Installing the Paper Feed Umit incieic noicaateicietoen tesa eesiekes 17 Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit ccc ceccceeceeeeeeeees 19 Chans me he Paper
5. E g press 6 If the Name Dial you are looking for does not appear keep pressing the key until it does MNO E g press Note You can also search through Name Dials that begin the same initial letter with the lt 9 Zoom and Zoom OL keys again 62 Dial Sec Org Select letter Marty Main Off FAXING Reports and Lists ddlalilaro Bial anlolt idare T he Journal is a record of fax messages that were recently sent or received by your machine By default it is printed automatically after every 35 commu nications You can print it out whenever you wish to check on machine usage or to find out if a communication was successful or not T he following items are included on the Journal e Own name this machine s Own name TTI identification e Transmission list of recent fax transmissions from this machine e Reception list of recent fax messages received by this machine e Date and Time when the communication took place e Address the fax number identification of the other party e Duration how long the communication took e Page how many pages the message contained e Result whether the communication completed successfully For how to turn automatic printing of the Journal on off see User Parameters see page 102 Help Press eer 1 Ojunation Prt Help List P 2 Press Zoom Gr Function no Oo lt a LL a Press b 41 Journal 4 Press OK Q Press Start
6. Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Registered D ws oe vy 6 Others Ok 11 Press QOhuinbton to return to the standby display X Tip If the paper feed unit option is not N installed and the machine is in copy Enlarge PaperSele 1 amp 0 Operation mode you can press Q Q vi Paper select in place of Oprincton in step E Next skip step 9 and gg and jump directly to step Eq 12 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Small Size Paper Ff Note We recommend that you always feed small size paper vertically with the shorter edge feeding into the machine first 1 Remove all paper before loading small size paper in the upper paper tray Open the small size paper feed access panel on the back of the machine by unlatching it as shown in the illustra tion Opening the small panel makes it easy to handle small size paper Of ZE FZ u S O O vg Ey Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide 4 After setting the paper into the tray raise the small panel until it snaps securely into place GETTING ACQUAINTED Press VCP 5 Ohuretion Prt Help List Press Zoom l 6 O F nction no Press 6s b l 2 Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size E Press OK Q f 61 Tray Pap 5ize
7. 6 O1 FAXING Repeat steps gq and gg for all adjust able volumes After adjusting the Ring volume and pressing OK Q the display opposite will appear Now go to step EJ 2 Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display Ey Do one of the following Enter another function number 3 FaxSwitch K Press O incfon to return to standby mode Sending Faxes Over Unreliable Lines Slow 4800bps If you experience problems sending faxes due to bad telephone lines you can reduce the speed at which your machine sends fax messages to 4800 bits per second H Note This setting does not affect the speed at which your machine receives faxes U se the following procedure to turn this feature on off Help Press Orunction Prt Help List gt 2 Press Zoom r PUMCE LOM MOr oo Press 2 2s 22 Slow 4800bps Press OK 4 Q 4800bps No VR 66 FAXING Press Zoom oL or lt 9 Zoom to adjust O 5 the setting 4800bps Yes K Press OKC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the Registered function menu will reappear 2 Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 2 Communi Cacti on K Do one of the following Enter another function number e Press Orao to return to standby mode RD S stands for Remote D iagnostic System If your machine has a problem
8. Prt Help List PR Press Start TECHNICAL REFERENCE Selecting the Language T he language for the display can be selected from the following Help 1 Press Orunction Prt Help List OK 2 Press Zoom or aO zom until 2 J ann Language appears l lt 2 Z L O Lu H N REFERENCE EJ Press OKC and press Zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the desired language appeals 4 Press OKC Registered F Note e Do not carry out any operations while 100 gI Registered appears on the display e The setting is not registered if OK Q 1S not pressed O1 N TECHNICAL REFERENCE selecting 300 dpi or 600 dpi Set the printer to 300 dpi if the designated output is not obtained when printing using aD O S application compatible with the 300 dpi PC L printer Help Press ae 1 QFuncrion Prt Help List OK Press Zoom or Zoom until 3 User Param appears The messages change in the following order 3 User Param i OK Z 3 Press Q and press zom to 3 0010 mooo q move the flashing block cursor until it appears in the position shown in the illustration to the right Up Press on to change the setting to 1 or 0 as desired Display Heater status 02 0010 0000 600 dpi default setting 02 0010 1000 300 dpi A Note The bits other than the one highlighted in the illustration are unrelated to this setting 58 5 Press OKC 2 Note Stop e To cancel this change pre
9. Start Press C Sal agile gh Sati SLO oip 6 FAXING Printing the Dial List Print this list to check on the names and numbers of Q uick D ials and Name D ials stored in the machine You can print the D ial list using the procedure below or when storing Q uick Dials T he following items are included on the D ial List e Own name this machine s Own name TTI identification e Own fax number this machine s fax number e Quick Dial list of Quick Dial labels and numbers e Name Dial list of Name Dial labels and numbers Help 1 Press Q Function Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press 2s AD Diak Iiro Oe 4 Press OK Q Press Start Start Press S PELNELNG asy Transmission Result Report By default this report is turned off If you turn it on this report will be printed after every fax you send T he following information is listed e From Owner this machine s fax number identification e To the destination fax number identification e Page s number of pages in document e Date Time when the communication took place 64 FAXING e Duration how long the communication lasted e Result whether the transmission was successful To turn automatic printing of this report on or off see Customising Default Set tings with the User Parameters see page 102 Error Report By default this report is printed automatically if a reception or tr
10. Start Press C to perform the copy opera tion 72 COPYING Reduction and Enlargement Reduce Enlarge Press Q the copy operation QO to select preset reduction or enlargement factors for To Set the Reduction Factor Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Reduce f Press until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 93 87 82 90 lt 71 A4 gt Ad Start Press C to perform the copy opera tion P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Ratio Original gt Paper size A little reduced 7 w Start 73 Z gt a O O Te COPYING To Set the Enlargement Factor Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Enlarge Press C until the desired size ratio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 115 122 141 A5 m Start 3 Press C to perform the copy opera ey tion Start Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings 74 COPYING Zoom in 1 Increments Zoom allows you to tune the preset reduction and enlargement factors to ex actly the value you want You can change the zoom factor in increments of 1
11. To enter a space press a Note The fax number can be up to 20 digits long Entering Numbers see page 30 Help 1 Press Function 2 Press Zoom Gr 36 Prt Help List DP Function no FAXING E Press 17 Own Fax No x 4 Press OK Q 5 Enter your own fax number on the numeric keypad 12 3 456m E g press PL 25423 PE 5s bs 2 Note To clear the entire setting make sure the All Delete E cursor is at the far left position then press Clear Q The display opposite will appear Press OK Q to clear the setting or press O Finson to cancel this operation 6 Press OK Q 2 Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Registered 1 Set up a Do one of the following Oo lt Le g Enter another function number Press O incfon to return to standby mode 3 N FAXING Setting the Date and Time T his is printed on reports to help you keep track of machine usage e If you make a mistake when entering a value press the Zoom and Zoom keys to position the cursor and enter the value again Help Press oad 1 KHOE OR Prt Help List gt Press Zoom i 2 O Function no Press bD 11 Date Time Press Oprincion to return to standby mode 4 Press OK Q Tines P1 ve 5 Press OK Q O KO O A Year 6 Enter the year on the numeric keypad Year 007z E g to enter the year 2
12. s ssssseesseeesesessssssssssssssssssssssseeererereeree eT To turn sorting on and off tas sen cieanenamenest saabnc oraedeseadedausouaawesscnameniacams 3 TROUBLESHOOTING General problems printing and COPYING cccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 39 Clearing a Paper Mis eed oscari ai 43 Paper Teed Wai eee E 47 USER MAINTENANCE Dailiy VCC CS soo aston estasgacepoecedenecaneseue tence E coeantcoeepeaceeacnacnae 49 Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad 00 50 OI ioe et oc cae cese E E E 53 PADOT MOC en ee eer eae eer Tn rea ern E 53 Tonor Ses isircl carrer te ene ner erences terran E ee errr 3 7 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Pining ihe Telp Lisi eea 54 Selecting the Lan OU ASS ssopesrnrier hnn NE 55 Selecting 300 dpi or 600 dpi ssssseeeeesesesessssssssssssssssssssssseeerrrerereee 56 Economy Mode saes ee a e a 58 Changing the Economy Mode ich srnennesencensacononcestesaieetotataatenssigiiens 58 Selecune Toner Save Mod eensssesosaree nan 59 6 SPECIFRICAHONS cates ces cesses n 60 NOOK aee E E 63 vil General Description Type 1 T he following describes the Type 1 machine T his information also applies to the Type 2 machine except where specifically noted in the next page Platen cover Lift this cover to access the Upper paper tray exposure glass when you want to Holds up to 100 sheets place an original on it for of plain paper for copying copying and printing Exposure glass
13. 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper and Other Media T he machine supports printing on the following types of paper media from the upper paper tray Refer to the following pages for details on loading each type of paper media into the upper paper tray Letter 81 x11 Note Do not attempt to use the following types of paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper paper containing carbon carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or other very thin paper 2 GETTING OQ Lu H a lt O lt D Q Q amp amp A v Q Q D gt E LLI A CAUTION Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper After you set up the machine and specify the paper size you are ready to actually load paper ik Important When loading paper into the upper paper tray make sure that you load maximum 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb Overloading the upper paper tray can cause misfeeds To load plain paper into the upper paper tray Fan the stack of paper to make sure that all pages are free and are not sticking together The upper paper tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 1b 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top EJ Set paper into the upper paper tra
14. I RICON Overseas Affiliates U S A RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell New Jersey 07006 Phone 1 973 882 2000 The Netherlands RICOH EUROPE B V Groenelaan 3 1186 AA Amstelveen Phone 31 0 20 5474111 United Kingdom RICOH UK LTD Ricoh House 1 Plane Tree Crescent Feltham Middlesex TW13 7HG Phone 44 0 181 261 4000 Germany RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Mergenthalerallee 38 40 65760 Eschborn Phone 49 0 6196 9060 France RICOH FRANCE S A 383 Avenue du G n ral de Gaulle BP 3307 92143 Clamart Cedex Phone 33 0 1 40 94 38 38 Spain i RICOH ESPANA S A Avda Litoral Mar 12 14 08005 Barcelona Phone 34 0 93 295 7600 Italy RICOH ITALIA SpA Via della Metallurgia 12 37139 Verona Phone 39 0 45 8181500 Hong Kong RICOH HONG KONG LTD 23 F China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road Wan Chai Hong Kong Phone 852 2862 2888 Singapore RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 260 Orchard Road 15 01 02 The Heeren Singapore 238855 Phone 65 830 5888 SUPPLIES MODEL NAME The correct model name of supplies for your Bizworks is RICOH TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1120D BLACK RICOH CO LTD 15 5 1 chome Minami Aoyama Minato ku Tokyo Phone Tokyo 3479 3111 Printed in The Netherlands EE G025 8600 RICOH enuen uoneiado y RICOR Operation Manual Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future refer
15. Setting Range Help Help Function Function Zoom gt OK Q 200 to 50 50 to 200 Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press lt 9 Zoom decrease or Zoom oL increase until the desired size ratio appears 100 01 Start Ey Press C to perform the copy opera tion P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings 75 Z gt a O O Te COPYING Adjusting the Copy Image To Select the Resolution Photo Setting Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press the Original Type Select key to specify the resolution or halftoning method for the copy operation Sort Text Photo Photo ory Copy Text Fine 1 2 TEL Ey A pointer W moves on the display to indicate the current setting Choose a setting that matches your original Text Fine Copying text Sort Text Photo Photo ory Copy Text Fine 1 2 TE Photo1 Copying photographs Photo2 Copying mixed text and photographs Note If the memory size of your machine is 4MB the machine automatically switches from Photo2 to Photol when you make multiple copies using the ADF Start Press C to perform the copy opera A tion Start P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press clear any settings
16. 12 14 08005 Barcelona Phone 34 0 93 295 7600 Italy RICOH ITALIA SpA Via della Metallurgia 12 37139 Verona Phone 39 0 45 8181500 Hong Kong RICOH HONG KONG LTD 23 F China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road Wan Chai Hong Kong Phone 852 2862 2888 Singapore RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 260 Orchard Road 15 01 02 The Heeren Singapore 238855 Phone 65 830 5888 SUPPLIES MODEL NAME The correct model name of supplies for your Bizworks is RICOH TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1120D BLACK RICOH CO LTD 15 5 1 chome Minami Aoyama Minato ku Tokyo Phone Tokyo 3479 3111 Printed in China UE G026 8547 l RICOH 406e 406eDF Operation Manual Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference For safety please follow the instructions in this manual RICOH CORPORATION CALLING FOR SERVICE For service in the United States call 1 800 RICOH38 1 800 742 6438 Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine Please read the safety information on pages i iii of this manual It contains Important Information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems Laser Safety The optical housing unit
17. 2 Press T or Gao until the de sired number of copies appears 100 10 2 Note You can specify the number of copies in the range of Ol to 99 Start Press to perform the copy opera tion Number of Note copies printed so far During the copy operation the display shows Page number the number of copies printed so far and that to be printed For example 02 10 appears while the second copy ofa run of 10 copies is being printed Number of copies to be printed 0 Tips Clear Modes ss e Press O to clear the setting after the copying has been finished Memory Copy Sort Memory Copy Q Type 1 or Q Type 2 produces copies at a faster speed but it can also result in a loss of printout quality With a Type 2 machine using 0 Memoy Copy also activates the Sort feature automatically 28 COPYING Making a Book Copy When copying from a book the thickness of the book should be no more than 30mm 1 18 1 Lift the platen cover 2 Open to the page you want to copy and lay the page face down on the exposure glass Be sure to align one of the cor ners of the page with the arrow mark on the scale EJ Lower the platen cover Start Press to perform the copy op eration Oo lt gt a e O er COPYING Reduction and Enlargement Reduce Enlarge Press QO QO select preset reduction or enlargement factors for the copy operation To set the reduction factor 1 Lift t
18. 34 gt 2 lt Z Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to select Mode Pulse Oe Pulse or Tone Press OK Q Ifthe display opposite does not appear press to finish Mode PABX No gt Press lt Zoom Or Zoom to select whether your fax machine is behind a PABX Mode PABX Yes Press OK Q O 1 Set up N If you chose No in step pg proceed to step Ifyou chose Yes proceed to step EJ BOSLIINC Dy 9 Enter the digit or digits that give you an outside dial tone on the numeric Postline by 0_ x keypad e g enter 0 You can enter 0 or a value between 01 and 99 00 is not possible Note When changing an existing setting press to clear it then enter the new number Clear Oo lt a LL Method 0 2y 10 Press OK Q 11 Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to se lect the PSTN access method Three methods are available lt number gt Access the outside line by dialling the number you entered in step EJ Ground Ground Start Flash Flash Start Method Flash 3 O1 FAXING Press OKC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear 2 Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 13 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Help Function to return to standby mode Registered O 1 Set up K Storing your Own
19. 7S in OO place of Cjancion in step Ea Next AS foPRecwe skip step Ej and gg and jump directly to step Ej Note e Be sure to specify the paper size before printing on A4 or Letter paper again 13 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Other Media U sethe following procedures to load envelopes transparencies and label paper To load envelopes Load up to 5 envelopes at a time using the same procedure for loading small size paper on page 12 e Insert envelopes print side up with the stamp position as shown e Envelope flaps should be securely folded down so the envelope is closed This is especially important when printing on envelopes with adhesive on the flaps because heat generated during the printing process can cause the adhe sive to melt and get on rollers Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 13 To load transparencies Load only one transparency at a time using the plain paper loading proce dure on page 10 for large transparencies and the small paper loading proce dure on page 12 for small transparencies PH Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 11 for large transparencies or page 13 for small ones To load label paper Load only 10 sheets of label paper at a time using the plain paper loading procedure on page 10 Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 11 GETTING ACQUAINTED Connecting a Second Printer Additional Printer T he machin
20. Alt Tab to display the Task List window e Select the application you want to quit e Click End Task and then press Enter to quit the program Repeat the above steps as many times as necessary to quit all applications that are running 2 The next step you should perform depends on whether you are install ing from diskette lt To install from diskette follow these steps gt Insert the diskette into your computer s floppy disk drive usually named A or B On the Program Manager File menu click Run Type X INSTALL replacing X with the name of the drive from which you are installing and then click OK Follow the instructions that appear on your computer screen Note that installation takes a few minutes After itis complete remove the diskette from your computer s drive New Hardware Found Window Perform the following steps when the N ew H ardware Found window appears after you first install the driver 1 Click Do not install a driver Windows will not prompt you again 2 Click OK R Note If the above window does not appear after you first install the driver check to make sure that the printer driver was installed properly and that you are using a suitable cable to connect the machine to your computer The above dialog box will not appear if you partially or completely installed this printer driver before 24 PRINTING Features You Can Access From the Printer Drive
21. Be sure to specify the paper size again before copying printing or receiving faxes onto A4 or Letter size paper If you do not you will not be able to receive faxes 14 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Other Media U sethe following procedures to load envelopes transparencies and label paper Kololo ao E a e 0 1 Load up to 5 envelopes at a time using the same procedure for loading small size paper on page 13 e Insert envelopes print side up with the stamp position as shown e Envelope flaps should be securely folded down so the envelope is closed This is especially important when printing on envelopes with adhesive on the flaps because heat generated during the printing process can cause the adhe sive to melt and get on rollers 2 GETTING OQ Lu H Z lt oO QO lt Refer to the paper select operation on page 14 Keotolellatemicelatele laler 5 gt Load only one transparency at a time using the plain paper loading proce dure on page 10 for large transparencies and the small paper loading proce dure on page 13 for small transparencies Refer to the paper select operation on page 12 for large transparencies or page 14 for small ones Kololoj aro i Kojo mel el Load only 10 sheets of label paper at a time using the plain paper loading procedure on page 11 Refer to the paper select operation on page 12 GETTING ACQUAINTED Second Additional Printer T his machine
22. Correctly load the toner cassette correctly into the machine If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Machine is out of toner Replace the toner cassette Clear paper Paper misfeed or paper Remove the misfed paper If a will not feed at all copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again If paper persistently misteeds carry out the procedure on page 89 Memory overflow Not enough memory Either lower the printer driver capacity PC printing Resolution setting or increase only memory capacity by installing a larger SIMM Press any opera tion panel key to clear the error message from the display Remove original Original misfeed or paper Remove the original from the P78 when original is set will not feed at all ADE Ifa copyjob is in progress in ADF set the copy quantity again Original left and An original may be left un Open the platen cover remove on glass der the platen cover any original that remains then lower the platen cover again 86 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 2 4 Memory full and Too much sort copy data Ost P23 80 Press Stop Press O to cancel sort copying If you need to print big copy jobs increase the memory capacity Start Too many sort copy pages Press C to print pages al P 23 80 ready stored in memory To can cel the job press O If you need to print big copy jobs in crease the memory capa
23. E Fonts oz Font Manager To add printer fonts lt E Overlays Overlay Assignments None All pages Odd Even pages First Other pages Cover Divider page Overlays Create New Overlay Manage Overlays Get files from other sources to use as overlays Send created overlays to other sources Rename overlays Remove overlays ik Important After printing a large number of pages wait a few minutes before turning off the machine 2 Note Be sure to use online help and Read me file of the printer driver to get the most out of all the printer features and functions 2 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Using the Second Printer Additional Printer Use the following procedure to switch between this machine and a second printer when a second printer is connected ik Important If the second printer has a bi directional mode make sure you turn it off Note Refer to page 16 for details on connecting a second printer Printing to the Second Printer Second Printer Press Q The Second Printer indicator lights PC Interface ik Important T Second Printer Whenever you change printers be sure to also change to the appropriate printer driver on your computer Note While the Second Printer Indicator is lit print data from your computer passes through the machine to the second printer Perform the required print operation with the application you are using 28 4 FAXING Your machine is furnished with superi
24. IEFE 1284 Scanner Specifications Configuration Flatbed ADF Document Size LG II HLT A4 A5 Bb Optical Resolution 300dpi Scanning Resolution 1bit 100 x 100 150 x 150 200 x 200 300 x 300 400 x 400 600 x 600 dpi Shit 300 x 300 dpi Resident Font Dutch 801 SWC Dutch 801 Italic SWC Dutch 801 Bold SWC Dutch 801 Bold Italic SWC Swiss 742 SWC e Swiss 742 Italic SWC e Swiss 742 Bold SWC Swiss 742 Bold Italic SWC Swiss 742 Condensed SWC e Swiss 742 Condensed Italic SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Bold SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Bold Italic SWC Incised 901 SWC Incised 901 Italic SWC Incised 901 Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Roman SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Bold 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Italic 12 pitch text SWC Fareserif 821 SWC Fareserif 821 Extra Bold SWC Ribbon 131 SWC Wingbats SWM Grey scale 256 levels 8 bit Interface IEEE 1284 ECP mode Compatibility TWAIN ADF Up to 10 pages of 80g m 201b Plain paper Maximum scanning size 212 x 351 6 mm OS Windws 95 98 only Copying Specifications Copy Speed 6 cpm copies per minute Warm up Time 30 seconds or less First copy 17 seconds or less Mulitiple Copies Up to 99
25. LL Cancelling Automatic Redial To cancel redialling remove your document from the AD F 43 FAXING Cancelling Transmission of a Fax To cancel a fax transmission while dialling or during transmission press the Stop key PE EAE and remove your document H Note Once a connection has been established and transmission has begun you cannot cancel transmission of data already sent 44 FAXING Receiving Faxes OF polos alo Mom lt ler Je foley lelel T his machine has two reception modes e FAX mode e TEL mode FAX Mode In this mode the machine automatically answers incoming calls When a call is received the machine rings a few times to alert you that a message is being sent then starts receiving and printing the message FAX mode is ideal for a dedicated fax line GH Note e The machine cannot switch between FAX mode and TEL mode automatically TEL Mode In this mode the machine does not answer incoming calls automatically T he machine will continue ringing until you pick up the handset option or start fax reception manually T his mode is useful if you are sharing the line with a telephone If the caller isa person you can answer the telephone normally but if it isa fax machine you can still receive the message Ff Note e On Hook dialling is not available in some locales e This mode requires someone to be near the machine to receive fax messages If nobody answers the call fax messages
26. Load only one transparency at a time using the plain paper loading proce dure on page 10 for large transparencies and the small paper loading proce dure on page 13 for small transparencies 2 Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 12 for large transparencies or page 14 for small ones Kolo oi aro i Kelel m wel el Load only 10 sheets of label paper at a time using the plain paper loading procedure on page 11 Note Paper select operation see page 12 15 2 GETTING m LLI F Z lt O O lt GETTING ACQUAINTED Second Additional Printer T his machine features a port for connecting a second printer W hen con nected press the Second Printer key to switch between the two printers H Note Make sure that the power of your computer is turned off before making the con nection Connecting to a Second Printer 1 Turn off both the machine and your sec ond printer Connect one end of a parallel interface cable to your second printer Connect the other end of the cable to the second printer port securing it in place with the screws Note e Only use a standard IEEE 1284 compliant 36 pin parallel cable Using the second printer see page 28 16 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper Feed Unit Option T his section describes how to install the paper feed unit option and how to load paper in it Addition of a paper feed unit provides you with a s
27. Minato ku Tokyo Phone Tokyo 3479 3111 Printed in The Netherlands EE G027 8600 RICON TAN zig HODIA 90L TE LETIA jenueyy uoneiado RICOH Operation Manual Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference For safety please follow the instructions in this manual Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in Declaration of Conformity this manual Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine Please read the safety information on pages i iii of this manual It contains Important Information related The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage to user safety and preventing equipment problems Directive 73 23 EEC Operator Safety In accordance IEC 60417 this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch This machine is considered a class 1 laser device safe for office EDP use The machine contains a 5 means POWER ON milliwat 765 805 nanometer wavelength GaAlAs laser diodes Direct or indirect reflected eye contact O means POWER OFF with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to t
28. Original is notsetcorrectly Set the original correctly p 41 78 feeds with ADE Curled original s Straighten out the original s p 41 78 Insert the original s from the p 41 78 least curled side Incorrect original specifi Use originals ofthe correctsize p 79 cations thickness and quantity Original is not fed ADF cover is open Close the ADF cover p 78 from the ADE Document is not set cor Set the document properly p 41 78 rectly in ADE Original is not fed out The document output tray Set the document output tray p 5 properly is not set correctly and the small pieces of plastic film correctly Periodic black marks Cleaning pad is not in Correctly install the cleaning p 97 on printed output stalled pad Black lines and marks Copyingto small size paper Place a sheet of the same sizeas p 70 on printed output the paper you are printing onto when copying from the Different original and behind the original exposure glass CODY paper Non white original back Adjust the print density p 77 ground l Dirty platen cover or expo Clean the platen cover and ex sure glass posure glass Black and white lines Dirty ADF transport path Clean the ADF transport path on printed output when using the ADF Unclear photographic Copyingin Text Fine Mode Use the Original Type Select key p 76 images to select the Photo1 or Photo2 Mode Parts of the original The correct paper size i
29. Place originals on this glass face down for copying Top unit Operation panel Key panel for controlling the machine Power switch Extend tray ma the machine on and Pull out to support paper output from the machine Top release lever Pull to release the top unit Output tray and open it Copy and printer output is automatically stacked up to 50 sheets of plain paper on this tray Scanner lock Locks the scanner to prevent damage during transport Be sure to release this lock before using the machine Small size paper feed access panel This panel can be l lowered to provide Xs easier handling when printing on or copying to small size papei Power socket SIMM cover Open this cover when you want to install a SIMM and expand memory Second Printer Additional Printer port You can connect a second printer to this port Computer port Connect your computer here viii Type 2 T he following describes the Type 2 machine Automatic Document Feeder Original Guide ADF Upper Guides the original Holds up to 10 sheets of paper for automatic paper tray correctly into the feeding Place originals face down machine Set the original so it is under this guide Document guides Slide the left guide to fit the size of the paper you are feeding Platen cover Top release lever Lift this cover to access the exposure glass when you want to scan a page from a book ma
30. Print the Unauthorized Call Report when an unregis tered caller tries to send you a fax when Author ized Reception is switched on Do not change this setting Automatically reduce re 0 This function turned ceived images to fit page off by default in some locales If you turn this func tion off some parts of the printed image may be lost REFERENCE l lt L Z T O Lu H 00 at 01 Available Explanation Settings a Operation mode 0 Fax home position 1 Copy 6 Do not change these settings Reset the image density and 0 No These settings have no resolution to the values be 1 affect on the copy fea low after sending a fax ture switching to fax operation mode or on power up Image density home b3 b2 position when bit 4 above 0 0 Auto is 1 0 1 Darker 1 0 Lighter 0 Resolution home position b1 b0 Text STD when bit 4 above is 1 0 0 Text STD 0 1 Text Fine 1 0 Photo 1 1 1 Photo 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE SWITCH 02 Exol ti Available APARNAMON Settings Do not change these settings PCL Resolution 0 600dpi 600dpi Set the printer to 300 dpi 1 300dpi if the designated output is notobtained when printing using a DOS application compatible with the 300 dpi PCL printer Toner Saving mode 0 Off of When Toner Saving is 1 On turned on the machine prints using less toner Use this mode if you wish to save on toner and do not mind lighter pr
31. Remove the original If there is on glass the platen cover no original open the platen cover and close it again Sto Memoly full and Too much sort copy data Press O to cancel sort copy Press Stop and perform the copy operation without sorting If you need to printbig sort copyjobs increase memory capacity 42 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 2 2 Start Memory full and Too many sort copy pages Press C to print pages already p 21 37 Press Start stored in peas to cancel the job press O If you need to printbig sortcopyjobs increase memory capacity Error 90 Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock turnthe p 3 machine off and then back on p 8 Error XX Possible machine defect Turn power off and then back on again If you have a problem with the machine and you can not resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter contact your service representative In case of Error XX messages be sure to turn off the machine before calling 3g w0 o S OO y o EL ip P 43 TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Paper Misfeed T his section describes how to clear a paper misfeed when one occurs CAUTION When removing misfed paper do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot Important Hold a misfed sheet with both hands and slowly pull it out Do not use a tool such as a screwdriver or tweezers as this may damag
32. Specify the paper size using the p 20 not printed out not specified operation panel Cannot print from a Second printer is not con Check connections and make second printer nected correctly corrections if necessary Second Printer Second printer is not se Press Q so the indi p 28 lected cator above itis lit Incorrect settings of the Use the printer driver ofthe sec second printer driver ond printer to turn off bi direc tional printing 81 TROUBLESHOOTING Copying and Faxing 1 2 sus Cause Remeay Page Frequent original mis Original is notsetcorrectly Set the original correctly p 39 69 feeds with ADE Curled original s Straighten out the original s out the original s Straighten out the original s p 39 69 p 39 69 69 Insert the original s from he p 39 69 least curled side Incorrect original specifi Use originals ofthe correctsize p 70 cations thickness and quantity Original is not fed ADF cover is open Close ADF cover from the ADE Document is not set cor Set cee document properly p 39 69 rectly in ADE Periodic black marks Cleaning pad is not in Correctly install the cleaning p94 on printed output stalled pad Black and white lines Dirty ADF transport path Clean the ADF transport path p 93 on printed output when using the ADF Output too light Low contrast original Adjust the print density Unclear photographic Copying in Tex
33. USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance Clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry 2 Note Turn off the machine before cleaning TENANCE z lt LLI v To Platen cover Type 1 K Type 2 Exposure glass USER MAINTENANCE Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad Printing on A4 size paper under the recommended temperature and hu midity conditions noted in the table under Environment on page 1 you can expect a toner cassette to print approximately 3 000 pages when you are printing typical business letters that have text covering 5 of the total sur face T he starter cassette that comes with the machine can print approxi mately 1 000 pages Pages that contain graphics use more toner and shorten the life of a toner cassette A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies A CAUTION When replacing the toner cassette and cleaningpad 7 YW Y v do not touch the fusing section because it could be Ss 4 very hot z f 7 a L N F lt gt yj Open the box of the new toner cassette and check to make sure it contains a toner cassette and cleaning pad GH Note Be sure to hold the toner casset
34. magazine or any other original that cannot be fed using the Top release lever ADE Pull to release the top unit and open it Output tray Prints are delivered here This tray can hold up to 50 sheets Document output tray Scanned documents are delivered here Scanner lock Locks the scanner to prevent damage during transport Be sure to release this lock before using the machine Upper tray extension Extend to support originals Small size paper feed access panel This panel can be lowered to provide easier handling when printing on NN or copying to small size paper gt lt SIMM cover Open this cover when you want to install a SIMM and expand memory Power socket Second Printer Additional Printer port You can connect a second printer to this port Computer port Connect your computer here TEL LINE Connect your telephone line and optional handset here Xi GENERAL Z O H am Q Y Lu OQ Operation Panel Check Display 5 Busy Receive File PO NEHOCE rt ey Copy Text Text Photo Photo TEL FAX Second Printer eet fine l 2 5 PA Note Be sure to panel the A iB 1D iE lt Fax amp AL protective seet from ony Light ais operation pane O Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge Paper Sele t Copy D 2 lt General gt Stop key Display Press this key to interrupt the current Messages and prompts appear here operation and return the machine to l th
35. pears f 1 Tray Pap Size gt Letter 8 2 X 11 P 2 GETTING When the correct paper size is on the display press Ok Q If the paper feed unit option page 17 is installed you can also select its paper size at this time H Note Do not carry out any operations while Registered appears on the display fa LLI F Z lt O O lt Registered 0 Tip If the paper feed unit option is not Paper Select in t TextFine Photol Photo2 installed you can press Enlarge Paper Select place of QOhinchon in step Eq Next skip step Ej and gg and jump directly to step Ej GETTING ACQUAINTED To load small size paper F Note We recommend that you always feed small size paper vertically with one of its shorter edges feeding into the machine 1 Remove all paper before loading small size paper in the upper paper tray Open the small panel on the back of the machine by unlatching it as shown in the illustration Opening the small panel makes it easy to handle small size paper Ey Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is FTT not higher than the limit mark on the Ma tray guide WEE l 4 After setting the paper into the tray raise the small panel until it snaps securely into place GETTING ACQUAINTED Press EE 5 QFinction Prt Help List Press z 6 oom gt 1 Tray Pap Size gt H Note If the paper feed
36. plain paper A4 IT LG 80 g m 20 Ib 10 sheets Output tray Capacity plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 50 sheets Memory 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16MB or 32MB EDO SIMM 60 ns 72 pin Dimensions 297mm x 352mm x 576mm Hx Wx D 11 70 x13 87 x 22 69 Hx Wx D Weight 15 5 kg 34 18 1b Type 1 Type 2 Power Supply AC 220 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption Max Printing Average Copying Average Stand by Average Economy Mode Operating Environment Temperature Humidity 10 C 50 F to 35 C 95 F 15 to 80 Machine Life 30 000 sheets 5 years Printer Duty 6 000 sheets 1 month Scanner Duty 2 000 sheets 1 month Paper Sizes Plain paper A4 210 mm x 297 mm A5 148 mm x 210 mm Letter IT 81 2 x 11 Legal LG 81 2 x 14 Half Letter 81 2 x 51 2 H 81 4 x 13 Government Letter 8 x 13 Government Legal 8 x 10 2 Envelopes C5 162 mm x 229 mm C6 114 mm x 162 mm DL 110 mm x 220 mm Transparencies Label Paper Printing Specifications Printer Language PCL 5e emulation Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1200 dpi x 600 dpi enhanced Print Speed 6 ppm page per minute Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper Paper Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 1b Interface IEEE 1284 compartible SPECIFICATIONS Resident Font Dutch 801 SWC Dutch 801 Italic SWC Dutch 801 Bold SWC Dutch 801 Bold Italic SWC e Swiss
37. sette slide along the guides inside the machine Note Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle 6 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into place Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette 1 SETTING UP Unlocking the Scanner Lock ik Important Be sure to unlock the scanner lock before using the machine The machine will not operate correctly if the scanner lock is not unlocked L 1 Unlock the scanner lock which is located at the back of the machine SETTING UP Installing the Upper Paper Tray Look at the rear of the machine and note the locations of the holes for in sertion of the upper paper tray on both sides 2 To install the upper paper tray press down on both sides of the tray making sure that it is inserted as far as it will go Note Paper will not be fed correctly into the ma chine if the upper paper tray is not inserted all the way in SETTING UP Other Settings for Type 2 To remove the protective sheet Open the ADF cover and then re move the protective sheet 1 SETTING UP Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place SETTING UP To install the document output tray Look at the rear of the machine to con firm where the document output tray should fit 2 Insert the pin at
38. 38 Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off 39 Sende PI ESen E N 40 How t0 Se nd a Fik eserse a ate 40 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers ccccccceeeeeeeeees 43 Entenne PAUSES eien tanec ena ieee ast 43 Entenne Tone Sean dedemheale nial adaaladdctadeealatass 44 Redialins a INUMDeR vetsieeieicen i E 44 PUMA MC Redial osaera a eaaa 45 Cancelling Automatic Redial cccccccsssssessssseeeeeeeeeees 45 Cancelling Transmission ofa Pax ciccia 45 Receivine AX GS oea ss sccaee sca ansesteantarcacnaciecioccmesnaone 46 vi Choosing a Reception Moderen 46 FAX Mod aissisrn iss aetstietesccteccediaincd A 46 TEL MOJ Porere e Serene tein trier neem er ere ere 46 Switcing between FAX Mode and TEL Mode 47 Receving calls in TEL Mode ccsesssseesseseseeseeeeeeeeeeees 47 Screening out Unwanted Faxes with Authorized Reception 48 Turning Authorized Reception on off eeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 Cancelling Reception Of a Fax cccccccsssssssssseesssssesseeeeeeeeeeeees 49 Makine Telephone C allieasren a 50 Faxing During a Telephone Calliesasaseanserasi a 50 Sending a Fax During a Telephone call 0 0 0 0 eee 51 Receving a Fax During a Telephone call c0c008 51 Monitoring the Line while Dialling with On Hook 32 Remote C han Era a a a a 52 Storing Fax and Telephone Numbers cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
39. 742 SWC e Swiss 742 Italic SWC e Swiss 742 Bold SWC e Swiss 742 Bold Italic SWC Swiss 742 Condensed SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Italic SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Bold SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Bold Italic SWC Incised 901 SWC Incised 901 Italic SWC Incised 901 Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Roman SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Bold 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Italic 12 pitch text SWC Hareserif 821 SWC Hareserif 821 Extra Bold SWC Ribbon 131 SWC Wingbats SWM 61 lt O O rr A O TIONS SPECIFICATIONS Copying Specifications Copy Speed Paper Weight 6 cpm copy per minute 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 lb Warm up Time Original Types 30 seconds or less Exposure glass Type 1 Type 2 sheet Book ADF Type 2 17 seconds or less Plain paper 80 g m 20 lb Mulitiple Copies First copy Maximum Original Size Up to 99 copies M 81 2 14 Copy Reduction and Enlargement 90 71 82 87 93 115 122 141 200 Copy Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper 62 INDEX MT MOI EEEN N Al Q Additional PUNE ssssnsasunsunnsssans 15 Auto image density ciossrosssaiinsaassss 34 Automatic Document Fe
40. B You can store multiple N ame D ials with identical first letters and step through them to find the one you want when dialling You can store up to 25 Name Dials Note You cannot store two Name Dials with the same name To check which N ame Dials are currently stored print out the D ial List Printing the Dial List see page 64 Quick Dials see page 54 Storing Name Dials Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xiv 30 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 43 Help 1 Press Q Function Prt Help List P 2 Press Zoom Gr Function no Oo lt a LL a EN Press b s 14 Name Dial Ox Press OKC 4 O Register On 5 Press OK 5 FAXING 6 Enter the fax number you wish to store with the numeric keypad Eg press h 23s 45 S865 EE Press OKC Enter or edit the name for this Name Dial Eg press YS QS zoom m 05 05 9S mma BPH P mn G Zoom 4 gt 25 25 25 Zoom gt 65 65 65 Zoom 4 gt P P Zoom 4 gt 9 Press OKC Note e Do not turn off the machine while Registered is shown on the operation panel display e Ifa Name Dial with the same name is al ready stored Name exists will flash on the display Enter a different name 10 Do one of the following To store another Name Dial go back to step cy To return to standby mode press On twice To access another function press Ornon once and enter another func
41. B MYZ B INXYZ Registered Print List gt Press Quick or Clearing Quick Dials Help 1 Press Qhinction 2 Press Zoom r 3 Press b 4 Press OK Q Press the Quick Dial key you wish to delete Sort M E g press O to select Quick dial 8 Clear 6 Press O i 2 Note If you do not wish to clear this Quick Dial press Oprincton twice to return to standby mode OK Press 8 Press Ona twice to return to standby mode FAXING Prt Help List DP Function no 13 OuUnek Dial z Print List P Press Quick or M2345 Delete Deleted 5 N Oo Z a LL FAXING Name Dials N ame D ials are a handy way of storing fax numbers that you dial regularly in machine memory W hen you store a number in a Name D ial you must also give it a name up to 10 characters long W hen dialling you enter the first letter of this name to quickly find the Name D ial you require Office B You can store multiple N ame D ials with identical first letters and step through them to find the one you want when dialling You can store up to 25 Name Dials FH Note You cannot store two Name Dials with the same name To check which Name Dials are currently stored print out the D ial List Printing the Dial List see page 64 Quick Dials see page 54 Storing Name Dials Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xii 30 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numb
42. Change with 2 Ox Change with 7 Ox Registered 3 Fax Switch Ox 5 ee Oo lt a LL a FAXING Storing Fax and Telephone Numbers T his machine provides two useful methods for storing fax and telephone numbers e Quick Dials e Name Dials 2 Note The maximum length of a fax number you can dial or store in Quick Dials Name Dials is 40 digits Quick Dials If you often dial certain numbers you can save time and effort by storing them in Quick Dial keys Once stored instead of entering a fax number directly on the numeric keypad just press the Q uick D ial key the number is stored in Sort Text Photo Photo Memory Ci 2 t Opy Text Fine 1 poa E If you store a number in a Q uick D ial you can also give it a name up to 10 characters long If you pressa Q uick D ial key when the display opposite is shown the stored name will come up on the display so you can check it You can store one fax number in each of the five Q uick D ial keys labeled A E To check the fax numbers stored in Q uick D ials print out the D ial List Printing the Dial List see page 64 Name Dials see page 59 For how to dial with a Quick Dial see page 55 step 5 54 Storing Quick Dials FAXING Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xiv Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 43 Help 1 Press QFnction 2 Press Zoom r EJ Press b bs ry Press OKC To select a Qu
43. Copy Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Fax Resolution Text Standard 203 x 98dpi Text Fine Detail 203 x 196dpi Quick Dials 5 Name Dials 25 INDEX te COB AE EA 69 Q Additional printer s s 16 Auto image density ccssssssssseesseen 76 Automatic Document Feeder ADF c eeeee X Settino atonoa saaa 69 Authorized reception sssri 47 Atonai OUI A oasen a 43 BUSY die Oaa aceon onan xiii Cancelling taransmission of 4 fax sceeseeeeeees 44 Changing On Off settings oo 67 Check display indicator 0 0 xiii Clearing a paper misfeed c cccccssccsessseseesaes 88 CICA Kiaan ntl davceenosee tinea aionuncan ete xii TTE r E E E E 97 COMPUTE DOLE resoneren a RE E xi Connecting a second printer Additional Printer o 16 Connecting to 4 COMPULEL ccsescsecsseessecesen 6 CONNECT Ait stctraca tills ates ANN 6 COPY OPTADO ecis AS 29 69 COGE CUIGES sinen mii 17 19 Daily maintenance servicio snazeeca thantedenmamsaannn 03 Date and UME Sesc 38 DEn KEY nann xiii Dako a 34 DP uann a xii Document guides iss vencscareestccvrnnemnteamaiene X Document output tray sii sccccctiouetreatiteliel d xi TOGA Aes eros ates aes ea et 4 INDEX Economy mode 4 5255 ccsacommmasencrrn sassnrmnecateee dae 105 Economy mode Clear modes key c cc0000 xii Economy mode indicator ccccscesseesseeseeees xii EMM ARSC CY sive ANNAR xiii FARO C osai E TE 74 Entering TUMDETS sacp
44. E 23 Small size paper feed access panel uu X Small size papet o s 13 DOT ie E 80 Sort Memory Key eccccsssscssccsesssecssssscssssssanee xiii EEIN S pete E ETO 66 SPECI CA ONS ssa 109 A O SA xii SLOP Key A xii Storing your own fax number s s s 36 DOP AGE aiia ees acti cde cecetet aos 100 Summer t Me seccccsccsnnactttet deccdedooeseammntsteeuseemntes 39 oO ES TIN esac havctacan TAN xi 32 OTN cates cece acta te cae 46 Telephone CALL ssa 50 TERETE enra AA 76 Toner cassette stali a 2 Re DIAC EREE 91 L E esis cane E 44 Top release lever c ssccsssssccsesssessssaescsssencesseeseen x TOP UU eee teereeneeeemers O X 114 Transmission result report c sececceecrserseeren 64 TRANS DALCTICIES oase e 15 Troubleshooting os ccscesaeescessipptiearecccsoatalls costae 82 db i EE EE EE PATTE ETTE E errr wre eee 33 Unauthorized call report swe orrccscaws 65 Upgrading Memory s s s 23 Upper paper tray s is x 6 11 Upper tiy Extenso uiuen X User DARAINICIOR cookers ey 103 Using the second Additional printer 28 Aa E EETA EPOE E TAE ET xiii Zoom In 1 increments voces 75 EE G027
45. Fax Number Store the telephone number of the line your machine is connected to T his will appear on the other party s display during communication and be printed on their and your own reports a Note In some locales you cannot store your own fax number If the other party is using Authorized Reception or a similar feature to han dle messages from certain senders differently they should specify this infor mation when registering Specified Senders on their machine To increase the legibility of your number you can insert a character and spaces To enter a press To enter a space press Ka Note The fax number can be up to 20 digits long Entering Numbers see page 30 Help 1 Press Orunction 2 Press Zoom r 36 Prt Help List P FOUnCELON MOs z FAXING iz Press 2 Ly Own Pax Nos z 4 Press OK Q ALE 5 DEnter your own fax number on the eee numeric keypad i Eg press Ph B PEPE 565 2 Note To clear the entire setting make sure the Delete K ot is at the far left position then press ear Q The display opposite will appear Press OK Q to clear the setting or press e l Qhinction to cancel this operation 6 Press OK Q GH Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Registered Do one of the following 1 Set up K Oo lt a LL 3 N FAXING Setting the Date and Time T his is printed o
46. Letter align it to the indexes on the scale e When your original is not standard size align the upper left edge of the original to the ar row mark on the scale 70 COPYING Making Multiple Copies Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Enter the number of copies you wish to make using the numeric keypad 100 10 E g to make ten copies press b P H Note If your document is not scanned in even when Start you press there is a chance it is not set correctly in the ADF Reset your document and try again For how to set documents in the ADF see page 78 Start Press to perform the copy opera Number of tion copies printed Note Page number sodar During the copy operation the display shows the number of copies printed so far and that to be printed For example 02 10 appears while the second copy ofa run of 10 copies is Number of copies being printed to be printed 50 Tips Clear Modes e After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings 5 COPYING 71 COPYING Making a Book Copy When copying from a book the thickness of the book should be no more than 30mm 1 18 1 Lift the platen cover 2 Open to the page you want to copy and lay the page face down on the exposure glass Be sure to align one of the cor ners of the page with the arrow mark on the scale Ey Lower the platen cover
47. Off Settings on page 68 Oo lt a LL 39 FAXING Sending Faxes How to Send a Fax T his is the basic procedure for sending a fax message For detailed informa tion and explanations of the advanced features available see the following pages Economy Mode see page 108 Setting Documents For Faxing see page 40 Adjusting Scan Settings see page 41 Quick Dials see page 54 Name Dials see page 59 Redialling a Number see page 44 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 43 Set documents you wish to fax in the same way as when setting originals for copying T here are two methods e On the exposure glass set documents face down one page at a time e In the ADF insert a stack of up to 10 pages face down For how to set a document on the exposure glass see Making a Copy see page 27 For the ADF see Setting an Original on the ADF see pages 35 36 1 Check that the standby display is shown 1003 01 If the display is blank press any key to exit Economy mode Fax i 2 If necessary press Fox Q to switch to Dial Set orig fax operation mode 40 FAXING EI Set your document in one of the follow ing ways In the ADF Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADF until the display changes to Dial number Make sure this message appears If it does not your document will not be scanned from the ADE Lift the platen cover then pl
48. PRODUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH IEC 825 LASER KLASSE 1 nach IEC 825 Laser Safety The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsys tems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Notes e Model names for the machines do not appear in the following pages Check the type of your ma chine before reading this manual Type 1 Bizworks 406 Type 2 Bizworks 406DF e Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine e Certain types may not be available in some countries For details contact your local dealer Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual With this machine refer to the metric version For good print quality Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product Power Source 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 2 2 A Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above For details about power con nection refer to page 8 Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and o
49. Telephone Numbers cccccececcceeeeceeeeeeeeeaeaaees 53 Ouk Dalh ee Onn ee nN DOE Ween Wei te OEE Cnt ne 53 SONNE QUICK Dial x s 2seusdadoleatia cake sepeebecctesarbonesateadalieed 54 Editing Quick Dials 20 0 0 ccccccccccsssssseessesseeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeess 55 Clearing Quick Dials ivaveodasusoacaisuetsnssleacedumsausstnavsudlensadaness 57 IN aa A NE 58 Sorin Name Dialer ateceatee eee hic otacacaseaanle 58 Delete Naime Dials eeioni oct un aaa enerremescdeals 60 Dialling with Name Dials cccccssessssseessessessseeeeeeeeeeeees 61 Repons and Listessa il ete tates alata E 62 Pinuno eJournals T 62 Primtime Me DALES esaa a 63 Transmission Result REDON arainipitngirna naa 63 Error Repok seine snae O E ERES 64 Power Failure REPON scsicsaceciacsiececsccestactieseainetiloadeeMaemasecciateomnentes 64 Unauthorized Cal REDO iac EA 64 Advanced TeaTS eanna aA E tent caaed 65 Making Machine Sounds Louder or Quieter cceeeeettees 65 Sending Faxes Over Unreliable Lines Slow 4800bps 66 FR Sasser ating ates cae A 67 Pate He aCe iy crete esearch eat ea ee 67 Chans me OWON SeS Senienos a 67 vil 5 viii COPYING IM aK aC OD setene a a ciate deaatesan Setsoaeidatbe 69 Making Multiple Copies 2c ccccscssevacscuseptevasenssae daadatevarcses damescdcndenitentees T2 Reducion and Enlargement sser teeta veeeetieedhabe hs 73 To Set he Redaction Factor oian E 73 To Set the Enlargement Factor 2hccc
50. Zoom to adjust i O 5 the setting 4800bps Yes K Press OKC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the Registered function menu will reappear Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Commun Cat ionfk Do one of the following Enter another function number e Press Ohunbton to return to standby mode RD S stands for Remote D iagnostic System If your machine has a problem a service technician can perform various diagnostic tasks over the telephone line from the service station to try and find out what is wrong T he service technician can also use this feature to change some of your machine s settings if you request it For this feature to work you must turn it on before the service technician starts the RD S operation on your machine For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On Off Settings see page 69 Page Header By default your T T 1 0 wn Number appears on top of faxes you send when printed at the other end If you wish you can turn this feature off For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On Off Settings see above Storing your Own Name TTI see page 33 Changing On Off Settings Use this procedure to turn the following features on or off Page Header see above Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off see page 39 RDS see above 68 Help Press hee 1 Ohunation P
51. a message on the display Original Type Select key Press to select a setting that best matches your copy original or fax document Image Type see page 76 3 Density key Press to make copies faxes lighter or darker Select Auto Image Density to let the machine choose a suitable setting Check Display indicator Blinks to alert you to read a message on the display Economy Mode Clear Modes 5 Busy indicator Lights during a fax operation and when making telephone calls PC Interface indicator Lights while the machine is receiving data from a connected computer lt Copying gt Sort Memory Copy key Press to change order in which your copy sets are delivered Sorting Output see page SO Reduce key Press to reduce the size of an image when copying To Set the Enlargement Foctor see page 73 Enlarge key Press to enlarge the size of an image when copying To Set the Reduction Foctor see page 74 xiii GENERAL Z O H am Q Y Lu OQ Check Display Busy Receive File z PC Interface araor Copy Text Text Photo Photo TEL FAX Second Printer ring J 1B 1C KO Au ee Copy Reduce Enlarge Paper Select a Paper Select key 3 Reception Mode key Press to select the copy paper size When the optional paper feed unit is installed press to switch between paper sources lt Faxing gt Receive File indicator Lights to let you know there is r
52. a pause in a fax number press ag T he pause is shown on the display as a character gt i ee FAXING Entering Tones Some organisations offer you special services by telephone which you can access using Touch Tone or DT MF tones To enter a tone press the 4O or keys Setting the Dial Mode see page 34 Redialling a Number T he machine remembers the last fax or telephone number dialled with the numeric keys a Q uick Dial or a Name Dial To redial a fax number follow the procedure below Note e If you dialled the last number with a Quick Dial or Name Dial the number will be dis played instead of the stored label e You cannot redial a number dialled with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode 2 Set your document Pause Redial EZ Press O Start 4 Press Continue the standard procedure for sending a fax 44 FAXING Automatic Redial If the machine cannot connect to the other party for some reason e g the line is busy when sending a document from the ADF it will wait a while and then attempt to dial again T his will be repeated until the con nection is made or the redial count maxi mum Is reached H Note The redial interval and count maximum vary according to your locale Cancelling Automatic Redial To cancel redialling remove your document from the AD F Cancelling Transmission of a Fax To cancel a fax transmission
53. a service technician can perform various diagnostic tasks over the telephone line from the service station to try and find out what is wrong T he service technician can also use this feature to change some of your machine s settings if you request it For this feature to work you must turn it on before the service technician starts the RD S operation on your machine For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On Off Settings see page 67 Page Header By default your T T 1 0 wn Number appears on top of faxes you send when printed at the other end If you wish you can turn this feature off For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On Off Settings see above Storing your Own Name TTI see page 33 Changing On Off Settings U se this procedure to turn the following features on or off Page Header see above Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off see page 39 RDS see above 67 Oo lt a LL FAXING Help 1 Press Function j 2 Press Zoom r 3 Press Bs b ry Press OK Q 5 Press lt 9 Zoom OT Zoom OL until the setting you wish to change appears on the display E g press Zoom E once 6 Press OK Q Press lt 9 Zoom Or Zoom OL to adjust the change 8 Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear H Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on
54. another function number Press Orne to return to standby mode Cancelling Reception of a Fax If for some reason you want to cancel reception of fax while it is being received do the following Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode Recep canceled Stop 2 Press QO H Note A portion of the fax message may still be printed 48 FAXING Making Telephone Calls If you connect an optional telephone handset you can use the same line for both telephone calls and fax messages 2 Note If you wish to be able to receive telephone calls be sure to select TEL mode Choosing a Reception Mode see page 45 Do one of the following 1 Pick up the telephone handset and dial with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode pick up the telephone handset and dial using the operation panel numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press the On Hook key and dial using a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key When the other party answers pick up the telephone handset FH Note In some locales On Hook dialling is not available and or you cannot dial using a Quick Dial Name Dial the number keys or Redial key when the handset is lifted 2 Continue your conversation as usual Faxing During a Telephone Call You can also have the machine take over the line and send or receive a fax message at the
55. any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flower pots glasses on the machine If the contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur Do not incinerate used toner or toner cassettes Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over it could cause injury When you move the machine unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock When the machine is not be used for a long time unplug the power cord When you pull out the plug from the socket grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or any other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur When removing misfed paper or replacing the toner cassette and the clean ing pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies Energy Star program Energy Star As an Energy Star partner we have de
56. below Sending a Fax during a Telephone Call EI Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode set your document and ad Mode Trans K just any scan settings as required Start 4 Press If the display opposite is not shown E ress lt Zoom OF Zoom Ae until itis p CONNECELNG4 4 6 Press OK Q then replace the handset 7 Press OK Q then wait until the follow ing display appears Replace the handset Receiving a Fax during a Telephone Call Make sure the machine is in fax opera 2 e A 5 tion mode and remove all documents Mode Trans K from the ADE Start 9 Press C Mode Recep x Oo lt a LL a 10 If the display opposite is not shown press lt Zoom or Zoom until itis Press K Replace the handset CONnneCTInG si 5 oh FAXING Monitoring the Line while Dialling with On Hook T his feature lets you dial a telephone number without lifting the optional external handset You can listen to what is happening on the line through the machine s internal speaker If necessary press lt ox O to switch to Copy DialsjSet Orig fax operation mode On Hook Press POL Q Dial number 3 Dial the telephone number using the numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key 123459 4 If you hear a voice answer pick up the On Hook Dial external handset press O again and continue your conversa
57. can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser sub systems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Notes e Model names for the machines do not appear in the following pages Check the type of your ma chine before reading this manual Type 1 Bizworks 406e Type 2 Bizworks 406eDF e Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine e Certain types may not be available in some countries For details contact your local dealer Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual With this machine refer to the metric version For good print quality Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product Power Source 120 V 60 Hz 4 2 A Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above For details about power con nection refer to page 8 Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
58. ce ee viii VVC EE AA E E ix Upgrading Memory sts siiccnciisnsiudscuiean 21 Upper paper tray s es viii ix 4 10 User Parameter cccccccssssssssesseseseseeseeesee 58 61 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer 26 it RIGO Overseas Affiliates U S A RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell New Jersey 07006 Phone 1 973 882 2000 The Netherlands RICOH EUROPE B V Groenelaan 3 1186 AA Amstelveen Phone 31 0 20 5474111 United Kingdom RICOH UK LTD Ricoh House 1 Plane Tree Crescent Feltham Middlesex TW13 7HG Phone 44 0 181 261 4000 Germany RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Mergenthalerallee 38 40 65760 Eschborn Phone 49 0 6196 9060 France RICOH FRANCE S A 383 Avenue du G n ral de Gaulle BP 3307 92143 Clamart Cedex Phone 33 0 1 40 94 38 38 Spain i RICOH ESPANA S A Avda Litoral Mar 12 14 08005 Barcelona Phone 34 0 93 295 7600 Italy RICOH ITALIA SpA Via della Metallurgia 12 37139 Verona Phone 39 0 45 8181500 Hong Kong RICOH HONG KONG LTD 23 F China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road Wan Chai Hong Kong Phone 852 2862 2888 Singapore RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 260 Orchard Road 15 01 02 The Heeren Singapore 238855 Phone 65 830 5888 SUPPLIES MODEL NAME The correct model name of supplies for your Bizworks is RICOH TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1120D BLACK RICOH CO LTD 15 5 1 chome Minami Aoyama
59. copies Copy Reduction and Enlargement 90 71 82 87 93 115 122 141 200 Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper Fax Specifications Modem Speed 14400 bps Protocol ITU Group 3 Compression Method MH MR MMR SPECIFICATIONS Paper Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Original Types Exposure glass sheet Book ADF Up to 10 pages of 80g m 201b Plain paper Maximum Original Size Legal LG 8 1 2 x 14 Copy Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Fax Resolution Text Standard 203 x 98dpi Text Fine Detail 203 x 196dpi Quick Dials 5 Name Dials 25 111 lt O Wu A O TIONS INDEX INDEX MTOM CODY teas Sie eis ase cene Man Nena tellement 70 Q Additional print t esensenineieenu 16 Auto image density sicyssctaceindbeateonerdorianaswen II Automatic Document Feeder ADP c cceeee X SAAR TETT EEE 78 Authorized reception u s 47 Automatic redial iio osetia icc onlantiicesecttta 45 BOOK COD t E 12 BUS INCICALOT onyen xiii Cancelling automatic redial 0 0 45 Cancelling taransmission Of 4 fax vo 45 Changing On Off settings oo 68 Check display indicator ss ssssesseswsenwaaresesspunass xiii Clearing a paper misfeed cccseccsessesssesenseses 93 CLEA OY itor E ENE EN EE xii Cleamine WAG en ais 97 COPALE POC Dansani a xi Connecting a second printer Additional Printer o 16 Connecting to 4 COMPULEL
60. e LINE the telephone line connection e TEL for an optional handset when sharing the line with a telephone 1 Insert the line cable into the LINE socket at the rear of the machine A Connect the other end of the line cable to your telephone line 32 Storing your Own Name TTI Store your name or name of your organisation W hen you send a fax this identification appears at the top of the page when printed at the other end It is also shown on the other party s display during communication It can be up to 32 characters long Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xii 29 gt gt lt Z Ifyou do not want this identification printed on faxes you send see Page Header on page 67 Help 1 Press Function Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no 16 Own name TTI EJ Press L 65 4 Press OK Enter your name or name of your organisation Bg mes GO 9 mor HHP nok 2 O PPG P Oe P zome 252525 om gt 6565 65 F zoom gt P P zm gt Note To clear the entire setting make sure the i WMYZ CO cursor is at the far left position then press 1 HEE Press OKC to clear the setting or press Ohinchon to cancel this operation Delete o 3 ee FAXING Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear HF Note 3 Do not carry out any operations while Reg Benoa a istered appears on the displa
61. easier handling when printing on or copying to small size paper Power socket SIMM cover Open this cover when you want to install a SIMM and expand memory Second Additional Printer port You can connect a second printer to this port Computer port Connect your computer here TEL LINE Connect your telephone line and optional handset here Xi GENERAL Z O H oC Q Y Lu OQ Operation Panel Check Display 5 Busy Receive File PC Interface Merory Copy Text Text Photo Photo TEL FAX Second Printer Fine a Zs FH Note Be sure to panel the top 7 r D E jarax O amp protective seet from oe or I the operation pane L Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge Paper sSele t Copy g O D O lt General gt Display Messages and prompts appear here 2 Fax Copy key Press to switch between fax Operation mode and copy operation mode The indicators to the left of this key show which mode the machine is currently in Numeric keypad Use these keys to enter the number of copies dial a fax number or specify values Clear key Press to delete the character to the left of the display cursor When the cursor is located at the far left position pressing this key deletes all of the input characters when programming functions only Start key Press to start copying or begin sending or receiving a fax xii Stop key Press this key to interrupt the current o
62. features a port for connecting a second printer W hen con nected press the Second Printer key to switch between the two printers FH Note Make sure that the power of your computer is turned off before making the con nection Connecting to a Second Printer a iis 7 ya LFH HOFFT gy Turn off both the machine and your sec ond printer Connect one end of a parallel interface cable to your second printer Connect the other end of the cable to the second printer port securing it in place with the screws FH Note e Only use a standard IEEE 1284 compliant 36 pin parallel cable Using the second printer see page 28 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper Feed Unit Option T his section describes how to install the paper feed unit option and how to load paper in it Addition of a paper feed unit provides you with a second paper source that holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or Letter size paper Important Make sure that machine power is turned off and that the power cord is unplugged from the power socket before installing the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit Part Names 1 Front guide 2 Side guide 3 Limit mark 5 Q 4 Paper size indicator A oe 5 Connector E E 6 Corner guides 4 i5 5 7 Metal plate N Q 1 Remove all the packing tapes from the paper feed unit and pull the paper tray out of the unit 2 After removing all tapes and cardboard from inside of the p
63. flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over it could cause injury When you move the machine unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock When the machine is not be used for a long time unplug the power cord When you pull out the plug from the socket grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or any other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur When removing misfed paper or replacing the toner cassette and the clean ing pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies Energy Star program Energy Star As an Energy Star partner we have determined that lorrie this machine model meets the Energy Star Guide lines for energy efficiency The Energy Star Guidelines intend to establish an international energy saving system for developing and introducing energy efficient office equipment to deal with envi
64. func cause there is a problem tion mode and rectify the prob with the printer lem indicated on the display Check fax no and Multiple attempts at Stop Press Stop communication with this Press to cancel the trans number failed mission In some locales if this number was stored in a Name Dial Quick Dial or the redial memory the number will be erased completely from the ma chine memory to comply with regulations Check the number is correct and store it again if necessary No dial tone No dial tone was detected Check the line connection and P34 if behind a PABX the PABX settings Set A4 paper Small size paper is loaded Load A4 size paper in the upper in the upper tray A4 size tray and register the correct pa paper is required for re per size setting ceiving faxes Set paper size The actual length of the Make sure the registered paper paper is less than the reg size matches the paper loaded istered paper length and register the correct paper size setting Error and Press An error occurred during Stop reception Press Q to clear the error message and inform the other party to send their fax again Not registered The Redial memory or Print the Dial List to check on pressed Quick Dial key is which Quick Dials have num empty bers stored in them Name No entry No name Dial exists with Make sure you selected the cor the initi
65. hear after pressing Start e Buzzer warning beep e g when cover is opened and the sound made every time you press a key on the operation panel e Ring ringing sound when a call comes in Note On Hook is not available in some locales Help 1 Press QFnction Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press HE 31 Adjust Volume 4 Press OK Q TX E Ok Press Zoom or lt Zoom to make the volume louder or quieter TX EE 6 Press OK Q 66 FAXING Repeat steps gq and gg for all adjust able volumes After adjusting the Ring volume and pressing OK the display opposite will appear Now go Registered to step E H Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Do one of the following gt Faxowl ten OK Enter another function number Press foncion to return to standby mode Sending Faxes Over Unreliable Lines Slow 4800bps If you experience problems sending faxes due to bad telephone lines you can reduce the speed at which your machine sends fax messages to 4800 bits per second 2 Note This setting does not affect the speed at which your machine receives faxes U se the following procedure to turn this feature on off Oo Z a LL nr Help Press QFnction Prt Help List P A Press Zoom r PUnCE LOM Ori oan Press 25 2s Ey 22 Slow 4800bps Press OK 4 Q 4800bps No gt 67 FAXING Press Zoom oL or lt 9
66. is locked Unlock the scanner by pulling the lever located at the back of the machine Open the ADF cover and then re move the protective sheet Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place SETTING UP Installing the Document Output Tray Look at the rear of the machine to con firm where the document output tray should fit Insert one end of the document output tray into the slot provided Then gently bend the tray so the other end fits into the second slot A _ O lt H _ Lu p Make sure the small pieces of plastic film curl upwards as shown ik Important Documents will not be delivered properly un less the pieces of film are set as shown SETTING UP Installing the Upper Paper Tray Look at the rear of the machine and note the locations of the slots for in sertion of the upper paper tray on both sides 2 To install the upper paper tray press down on both sides of the tray making sure that it is inserted as far as it will go Note Paper will not be fed correctly into the ma chine if the upper paper tray is not inserted all the way in Preparing the Output Tray 1 Pull out the output tray extension as shown SETTING UP Connecting to a Computer ik Important Make sure that the power of both the machine and your computer is turned off before making the connection 1 Plug one end of the provided parallel ATT a cable into
67. it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step Ej on either side of the starter toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine 2 Note Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle To close the front unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the front unit closes and clicks securely into place Ff Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette Lower the ADF as shown SETTING UP 1 SETTING UP SETTING UP Installing Other Hardware Removing the Protective Sheet Open the ADF cover and then re move the protective sheet Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place Look at the rear of the machine and note the locations of the slots for in sertion of the upper paper tray on both sides 2 To install the upper paper tray press down on both sides of the tray making I sure that it is inserted as far as it will go LOTH 77 p 9 M j Nok Ges Paper will not be fed correctly into the ma e chine if the upper paper tray is not inserted a wee all the way in cS
68. left on the expo sure glass ment when scanning from 1 1200mm from the next power on the ADF Automatically print the 0 No Transmission Result Report 1 Yes after every successful trans mission 103 Maximum length of docu 0 400mm This setting takes effect TECHNICAL REFERENCE SWITCH 00 2 2 a inatl Available euro Settings az y print the 0 No Journal after every 35 com 1 Yes munications Print the Unauthorized Call Report when an unregis tered caller tries to send you a fax when Author ized Reception is switched on Do not change this setting Automatically reduce re ceived images to fit page ra 01 This function turned off by default in some locales If you turn this func tion off some parts of the printed image may be lost Available Explanation Settings ca Operation mode 0 Fax home position 1 Copy 6 Do not change these settings Reset the image density and resolution to the values be low after sending a fax switching to fax operation mode or on power up Image density home position when bit 4 above is 1 Resolution home position when bit 4 above is 1 104 0 No These settings have no affect on the copy fea ture b3 b2 0 0 Auto 0 1 Darker 1 0 Lighter b1 b0 0 0 Text SID 0 1 Text Fine 1 0 Photo 1 1 1 Photo 2 Text STD TECHNICAL REFERENCE SWITCH 02 Exol ti Available neato Settings Do not change t
69. loading small size paper in the upper paper tray Open the small size paper feed access panel on the back of the machine by unlatching it as shown in the illustra tion Opening the small panel makes it easy to handle small size paper Of ZE FZ u S O O ig Ey Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is 7 z not higher than the limit mark on the Ler tray guide fj ER D P i 4 After setting the paper into the tray raise the small panel until it snaps securely into place GETTING ACQUAINTED Press QEP 5 QForction Prt Help List 6 Press Zoom gt Function no Press 6s b FH Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size E Press OK Q 61 Tray Pap Size v Tray guide OK OR Press OK Then press Zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the correct paper size appears A5 B When the correct paper size is on the eked display press OKC eer ii fa 6 Others Ox 2 Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 11 Press Oa to return to the standby display X Tip If the paper feed unit option is not installed and the machine is in copy operation mode you can press Paper Select Helo ss Enlarge PoperSelee lt a in place of Function In Q Q i gt ste Next skip step Gj and E3 and jump directly to step E ik Important
70. ofthe sec second printer driver ond printer to turn off bi direc tional printing 40 TROUBLESHOOTING Copying Error 90 appears on Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock turn the display and the copy the machine off and then back operation is aborted on when copying from the exposure glass Frequent original mis Original isnotset correctly Set the original correctly feeds with ADE Curled original s Straighten out the original s Insert the original s from the p 35 least curled side Incorrect original specifi Use originals ofthe correctsize 36 cations thickness and quantity Original is not fed ADF cover is open Close the ADF cover a0 from the ADE Original is not fed out The document output tray Set the document output tray p 6 properly is not set correctly and the small pieces of plastic film correctly in 5 Li Periodic black marks Cleaning pad is not in Correctly install the cleaning on printed output Stalled pad i Black lines and marks Copying to small size paper Place a sheet ofthe same sizeas p 2 on printed output with the Type 2 machine the paper you are printing onto 0 7 when copying from the Different size original and behind the original exposure glass copy paper Non white original back Adjust the print density ground Dirty platen cover or expo Clean the platen cover and ex sure glass posure glass Black and white l
71. or Name D ial to send at least one message to that destination the message is accepted GH Note You can store up to 30 Specified Senders 25 Name Dials and 5 Quick Dials To set up your machine for Authorized Reception you need to 1 Turn Authorized Reception on Make sure all the Specified Sender fax numbers are stored in Quick Di als or Name Dials 3 Make sure that you have sent at least one message to all the Specified Senders using their Name Dials or Quick Dials After one message has been sent the Specified Sender is enabled and you can receive fax mes sages from them 2 Note If you turn Authorized Reception on and omit steps 2 and 3 above the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages Storing Editing and Deleting Quick Dials see page 53 Storing and Deleting Name Dials see page 58 Unauthorized Call Report see page 64 Turning Authorized Reception on off Help 1 Press Function Prt Help List P 2 Press Zoom r Function no Oo lt a LL EJ Press 2 b 21 Auth r RX VE Press OKC 4 Q Mode Off x 5 Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to adjust the setting Mode On K D N FAXING 6l Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear 2 Note 2 Communication x Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Registered Do one of the following Enter
72. pa per onto the ADE 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top EJ Place the stack of originals face down on the ADF and slide the document guide against the side of the stack H Note The side of the original to be copied should be face down Oo lt gt a e O mp 4 Insert the stack of originals along the document guide into the ADE R Note Insert your stack of originals into the ADF until it stops If you do not push it right in the machine will not detect the stack COPYING 5 Stretch the extend tray that supports the originals Start 6 Press C to perform the copy op eration Note e fan original becomes misfed during feed St ing by the ADF press O to stop the op eration Refer to Clearing a Paper Misfeed on page 43 e We recommend to use the TEXT mode when copying with the ADF Originals that do not meet the following requirements can cause paper misfeeds and even damage the machine E Requirements Thickness 0 05mm to 0 2mm 0 002 to 0 08 Weight 60 to 90 g m 161b to 24lb Clear markings Markings on the originals must be clear to be read correctly Uniform page size All pages should be the same size e Page condition Avoid using originals that are bent curled damaged or stapled and originals printed on coated paper carbon paper or photographic paper COPYING sorting Outpu
73. port to ECP 41 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 2 The table below explains the error messages that may appear on the display and the appropriate action to take Close cover Top unit is open Close the top unit Ifa copy job is in progress set the copy quan tity again Add paper Machine is out of paper Load paper If a copy job is in p 10 18 progress set the copy quantity again Toner near end Machine is almost out of Prepare a toner cassette for re toner placement Add Toner Toner cassette is notloaded Correctly load the toner cassette p 2 correctly into the machine Machine is out of toner Replace the toner cassette and p 52 set the copy quantity again dur l ing a copy job Clear paper Paper misfeed or paper Remove the misfed paper If a will not feed at all copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again If paper persistently msifeeds carry out the procedure on page 49 Memory overflow Not enough memory ca Either lower the printer driver s pacity PC printing only Resolution setting or increase memory capacity by installing a larger SIMM Press any opera tion panel key to clear the error message from the display Remove original Original misfeed or paper Remove the original from the ADF p 48 when originalis setin will not feed at all and set the copy quantity again ADF Original left and An original may be under
74. power cord Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do notremove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an elec tric shock Also reflected eye contact with the leaser beam may cause seri ous eye damage When the machine needs to be checked adjusted or re paired contact your service representative Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine There is a risk of fire electric shock explosion or loss of sight If the machine looks damaged or breaks down smoke is coming out there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual immediately turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall Do not continue using the machine in this condition Contact your service representative If metal liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord Contact your service representative Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flower pots glasses on the machine If the conte
75. search through Name Dials that begin the same initial letter with the lt 9 Zoom and Zoom OL keys ear p CI ress Q Do one of the following To delete the Name Dial press OK Q and go to step E 60 Prt Help List DP Function no 14 Name Dial SKg O A Delete Select letter Marty Delete Deleted O A Delete To cancel this operation press Oprincton ej ther enter another function number or press rey to return to standby mode Do one of the following To delete another Name Dial go to step Ey To return to standby mode press O Finson twice To access another function press Oprincton once and enter another function number Dialling with Name Dials FAXING Instead of dialling the number on the numeric keypad do the following in fax operation mode How to Send a Fax see page 40 Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode Name 2 Press O Enter the first letter of the Name Dial label E g press 6 If the Name Dial you are looking for does not appear keep pressing the key until it does E g press 6 again 2 Note You can also search through Name Dials that begin the same initial letter with the lt 9 Zoom and Zoom oL keys Dialyoet Orig Select letter Marty Main Off Oo lt a LL FAXING Reports and Lists Printing the Journal T he Journal is a record of fax messages that were recently sent or receive
76. sveminnrnen ectner ts hr ene Dyer enentnrrernrn nenen iy eT tem 60 Changing the Economy Modeen iser osi 60 Selectine Toner Save Mode wisiiuisicissiicteiisinstivis aide 61 SPECIFICATIONS ceadan a 62 Laro gt APAE A EA N E T EA E A eee 65 vil Part Names Type 1 T he following describes the Type 1 machine T his information also applies to the Type 2 machine except where specifically noted in the next page Platen cover Lift this cover to access the Upper paper tray exposure glass when you want to Holds up to 100 sheets place an original on it for of plain paper copying and scanning Exposure glass Place originals on this glass face down Operation panel Key panel for controlling Z the machine Power switch Turns the machine on and Output tray extension off Pull out to support paper output from the machine Top release lever Pull to release the top unit Output tray and open it Prints are delivered here This tray can hold up to 50 sheets Scanner lock Locks the scanner to prevent damage during transport Be sure to release this lock before using the machine Small size paper feed access panel This panel can be lowered to provide Xs easier handling when AN SIMM cover Open this cover when you want to printing on or N install a SIMM and copying to small size expand memory paper Power socket S Second printer Additional Printer port You can connect
77. the User Parameter bit switches T he following procedure describes how to change the U ser Parameters Help 1 Press Qhfuncton Prt Help List gt 2 Press Zoom r Function No Press Bs Ds 52 User Param 4 Press OK Q 00 2000 LOLI g Press lt S Zoom or Zoom until the switch you wish to edit appears E g press Zoom twice to show switch 02 O02 1110 0000 102 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 02 L110 Too 2 6 To toggle the value of a single bit press the number on the numeric keypad that corresponds to the number of the bit you wish to change E g press bs to change bit 3 Please wait Press OKC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display T Registered Do one of the following be ET o Enter another function number Press Help Function to return to standby mode l lt L Z L O Lu H 00 REFERENCE User Parameter Switch Summary T he following tables summarize the U ser Parameter bit switches and their meanings SWITCH 00 1 2 n eooo Seam women voe 7 Width scanned when faxing 0 210 mm 44 210mm 44 This setting takes effect a document 1 216mm L LG from the nextpower on l Display Original left on 0 Yes glass Warning when scan ning from the ADF and an original is
78. the display Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Ora to return to standby mode 68 Prt Help List Function no 51 Select Page Header Summer Time Mode Off Mode On Registered 5 Select gt OK Ok Ok Ok Ok 5 COPYING Making a Copy You can load up to 10 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 Ib at atime into the Automatic D ocument Feeder AD F Fk Important Check to make sure that the ADF cover is securely closed before using it Before you start make sure the machine is in copy operation mode and the display opposite is shown To switch_between copy operation mode and fax operation mode press tox Q Copy Enlarge PaperSele a0 Ovi 1 Fan the stack of originals Never try to place more than 10 sheets of plain pa per onto the ADE A Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top 2 Z gt A O O Te COPYING Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE H Note The side of the original to be copied should be face down 4 Insert the stack of originals along the document guide into the ADE Note Insert your stack of originals into the ADF until it stops If you do not push it right in the machine will not detect the stack 5 Make sure the upper tray extension is pulled out Start Press to perform the copy opera tion H Note e If
79. the lower port on the side of F7 FH D the machine and secure it in place as i O shown in the illustration A H Note m e The machine must be connected to a com puter for printing a e Use the cable that comes with the machine to connect to your computer Connect the other end of the parallel cable to your computer s parallel printer port SETTING UP Connecting the Telephone Line and Op tional Telephone Handset T here are two similar sockets located at the rear of the machine e LINE the telephone line connection e TEL for an optional handset when sharing the line with a telephone 1 Plug the line cable into the LINE socket at the rear of the machine 2 Connect the other end of the line cable to your telephone line wall socket If you have the optional telephone hand set now do the following Plug the telephone handset cable into the TEL socket at the rear of the ma chine 4 Connect the other end of the telephone handset cable to your telephone 2 Note If you wish to also be able to receive incom ing telephone calls you must set the Recep tion mode to Telephone Choosing a Reception Mode see page 46 SETTING UP Turning On the Machine A WARNING Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cable Do not place heavy objects
80. the toner cassette was set forward Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Close the front unit When the front unit is closed the mo tor will start running When the sound of the motor stops set paper in the original position and continue with nor mal operation 92 7 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance Clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry 2 Note Turn off the machine before cleaning TENANCE Z lt cr TT V D N Qs WSS Z 2 7 7 AN SS SYS boos Se YOTs 93 USER MAINTENANCE Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad Printing on A4 size paper under the recommended temperature and hu midity conditions noted in the table under Environment on page 1 you can expect a toner cassette to print approximately 3 000 pages when you are printing typical business letters that have text covering 5 of the total sur face T he starter cassette that comes with the machine can print approxi mately 1 000 pages Pages that contain graphics use more toner and shorten the life of a toner cassette A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies A CAUTION When replacing th
81. tray 30 000 sheets 5 years plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 100 sheets i Optional paper unit Printer Duty plain paper 80 g m 20 lb 250 sheets 6 000 sheets 1 month ADF Auto Document Feeder Capacity plain paper Scanner Duty M IT LG 80 g m 20 lb 10 sheets 2 000 sheets 1 month Output tray plain paper 80 g m 20 lb 50 sheets Paper Sizes Plain paper Memory A4 210 mm x 297 mm 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16MB or 32MB AD 148 mm x 210 mm EDO SIMM 60 ns 72 pin letter IT 84 2 x 11 Legal LG 81 2 x 14 Dimensions Half Letter 51 2 81 2 297mm x 352mm x 576mm Hx Wx D FA 81 4 13 11 70 x13 87 x 22 69 Hx Wx D Envelopes Weight C5 162 mm x 229 mm 15 5 kg 34 18 lb Co 114 mm x 162 mm DL 110 mm x 220 mm Power Supply Other AC 220 to 240 V Transparencies 90 60 Hz Label paper TIONS lt Q rr A O Power Consumption Max Printing Average Copying Average Stand by Average PC Scan Average Sending Faxes Average Receving Faxes Average Economy Mode Operating Environment Temperature Humidity 10 C 50 F to 35 C 95 F 15 to 80 109 SPECIFICATIONS Printing Specifications Printer Language PCL 5e compatible Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1200 dpi x 600 dpi enhanced Print Speed 6 ppm pages per minute Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper Paper Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Interface
82. while dialling or during transmission press the Stop key and remove your document Note Once a connection has been established and transmission has begun you cannot cancel transmission of data already sent Oo lt a LL FAXING Receiving Faxes OF polos lare Mom lt ler Je ifo a mu lelel T his machine has two reception modes e FAX mode e TEL mode FAX Mode In this mode the machine automatically answers incoming calls When a call is received the machine rings a few times to alert you that a message is being sent then starts receiving and printing the message FAX mode is ideal for a dedicated fax line 2 Note e The machine cannot switch between FAX mode and TEL mode automatically TEL Mode In this mode the machine does not answer incoming calls automatically T he machine will continue ringing until you pick up the handset option or start fax reception manually T his mode is useful if you are sharing the line with a telephone If the caller iS a person you can answer the telephone normally but if it isa fax machine you can still receive the message a Note e On Hook dialling is not available in some locales e This mode requires someone to be near the machine to receive fax messages If nobody answers the call fax messages will not be received Receiving Calls in TEL Mode see page 47 46 FAXING Switching between FAX Mode and TEL Mode Press the Reception Mode key to switch betw
83. will be printed out when power is restored When the Receive File Indicator is lit see page 87 Unauthorized Call Report If you have set up Authorized Reception and turned this report on a report is printed if an unauthorized sender tries to send you a message By default this report is turned off Turn it on with the U ser Parameters Authorized Reception see page 46 User Parameters see page 100 T he following items are recorded e From the fax number id of the sender e Date Time when they tried to send the message FAXING Advanced Features Making Machine Sounds Louder or Quieter T his machine makes various sounds during operation You can adjust the vol ume of these sounds or turn them off completely according to your taste You can change the following e TX the sound of a fax being sent e RX the sound of a fax being received e On Hook sounds made when using the On Hook feature e Dialling tones you hear after pressing Start e Buzzer warning beep e g when cover is opened and the sound made every time you press a key on the operation panel e Ring ringing sound when a call comes in Ff Note On Hook is not available in some locales Help 1 Press Function Prt Help List P Oo Z a LL A Press Zoom Gr Function no Press JE i 31 Adjust Volume 4 Press OK Q Press Zoom or lt G Zoom to make the volume louder or quieter TX EE Ox 6 Press OK Q
84. your original jams while being fed into Stop the ADF press to cancel the opera tion See page 90 for how to clear the jam 70 COPYING O riginals that do not meet the following requirements can cause paper misfeeds and even damage the machine E Requirements Thickness 0 05mm to 0 2mm 0 002 to 0 08 Weight 60 to 90 g m 16lb to 241b Clear markings Markings on the originals must be clear to be read correctly Uniform page size All pages should be the same size e Page condition Avoid using originals that are bent curled damaged or stapled and originals printed on coated paper carbon paper or photographic paper 2 Z gt A O O Ts 71 COPYING Making Multiple Copies Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE A Enter the number of copies you wish to make using the numeric keypad E g to make ten copies press L Pp 2 Note If your document is not scanned in even when Start you press there is a chance it is not set correctly in the ADF Reset your document and try again Start Press to perform the copy opera tion Note During the copy operation the display shows the number of copies printed so far and that to be printed For example 02 10 appears while the second copy of a run of 10 copies is being printed Tips Clear Modes 100 10 Number of copies printed so far Page number Number of copies to be printed e Aft
85. 0 minutes or 235 minutes according to the setting the heater turns off Feonomymode ee panel Heater turns off after turns of after ON default setting 15 minutes including time when operation panel is off 240 minutes including time when operation panel is off 2 Note e In Economy Mode the heater turns back on in the following cases When any key on the operation panel is pressed When the platen cover is opened When paper is set in or removed from the upper paper tray When the tray of the paper feed unit option is pulled out or pushed back into the machine When the top unit is opened When an original is set in or removed from the ADF On initiation of fax operations such as fax reception lifting the headset etc On initiation of PC printing e Whena key on the operation panel is pressed to turn the heater on the key does not perform its normal function e After the heater is turned back on the previous quantity Sort settings en tered fax number original type and various other settings are cleared gt o gt o Changing the Economy Mode Hold down the Clear modes key for approximately 1 second until the Economy mode indicator lights or goes out as required Economy Mode ON Economy Mode OFF I Nomy Economy DEF d Node DEF Mode Clear Modes e Clear Modes Stop EIN 108 9 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Paper Capacity Machine Life Upper
86. 0 x 300 212 x 351 6 mm 400 x 400 600 x 600 dpi Os 300 x 300 dpi Windws 95 98 only SPECIFICATIONS Copying Specifications Copy Speed Paper Weight 6 cpm copy per minute 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 lb Warm up Time Original Types 30 seconds or less Exposure glass Type 1 Type 2 sheet Book ADF Type 2 17 seconds or less i to 10 pages of 80 g m 20 1b Mulitiple Copies Plain paper Up to 99 copies First copy Maximum Original Size Copy Reduction and Enlargement Legal LG 8 1 2 x 14 90 65 77 93 LGL LTR Copy Resolution 121 129 155 200 LTR LGL 600 dpi x 600 dpi Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper 64 INDEX VU cp EG 0 E A eerste rent rete erent tear treeresnce Zi Q Additional Printet asnasa 15 Autoimage deni zn a 34 Automatic Document Feeder ADF e 00e ix Setine Aronga 35 BOOK COD aosiaoctctas sarsaattaeseen dei taeesentian toe 29 Check DIS play oiseuse X Clearing a Paper Misfeed cccccscseesesseeseeeee 43 CIC AITO AN an Ge eae ean ts Pos 52 COMPUT DOLE orea nE Vili 1x Connecting a Second Printer Additional Printer c c cccescccscccssecsesteeseseeee 15 Connecting tO a Computer oo eects 7 COMMCCIOR r pe ore tear Seta 2 16 Copy Mode Korai xi Corner guid s s cits 16 18 Daily Maintenance sssessssssssssssssssssssssserrreereees 51 DENSITY KEV a ANNS X D ee O xi Document SUIS sssaaa ix Docum
87. 000 press P P Press OK Q Month O27 8 Enter the month on the numeric keypad E g press P 55 Month OS x 38 FAXING 9 Press OK Q Day Onl Enter the date on the numeric keypad E g press 25 bs Day Doe Press OKC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear GH Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 1 Set up K 12 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press O incfon to return to standby mode Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off T his feature is useful if local custom requires advancing or setting the clock back One minute after you turn Summer Time on the clock advances by an hour Similarly one minute after you turn Summer Time off the clock is put back an hour For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On Off Settings on page 67 g Z a LL 39 FAXING Sending Faxes How to Send a Fax T his is the basic procedure for sending a fax message For detailed informa tion and explanations of the advanced features available see the following pages Economy Mode see page 105 Quick Dials see page 53 Name Dials see page 58 Redialling a Number see page 43 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 42 1 Check that the standby display is shown 1003 01 If the display i
88. 1 EJ Insert the provided software CD into your CD ROM drive 25 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Do one of the following according to your operating system Windows 95 98 Run the setup application For example if your CD ROM is assigned to D run D Scan in Setup exe Windows 3 1 First copy the disk images under the directory named 3 1 on the CD ROM to floppy disks Then insert the first floppy disk into your floppy disk drive and run install exe Note You cannnot install from CD ROM under Windows 3 1 Only the printer driver will be installed under Windows 3 1 5 Follow the instructions that appear on the display For detailed information on how to print and scan from your PC please refer to the online help provided 26 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver Printer Driver Contents E Paper Defaults Paper size Size Measurement Unit Page orientation Portrait Landscape Output Copies Print in reverse order Paper source Source About E N Up Printing Select a Layout Option Normal Reduce for N up printing Print page borders 2 pages up sheet 4 pages up sheet E Document Document Type Settings Automatic Photo Desktop High Speed Business Grayscale Publishing Draft Graphics Font Resolution 600 000 o 3w wo E Job Settings True Type Mode Name Z S E Configuration S Device Configuration Feeder Toner Save Mode Time out A A
89. 2 Note To clear the Lefrmost digit press Zoom r 183456789 B3456789 Press OKC B MYZ 8 Fdit the name stored in this Quick Dial E g Press 2s To move the cursor press lt 9 Zoom or Zoom Or 9 Press OK Q Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display t septs B INXYZ Registered Oo lt a LL a Print List P Press Quick or 10 Do one of the following To edit another Quick Dial go to step Ey Help P a to standby mode press O Bieta 5 N FAXING Clearing Quick Dials Help 1 Press Orunction A Press Zoom r Ey Press b 3 4 Press OK Q Press the Quick Dial key you wish to delet Sort M E g press G 4 to select Quick dial 8 Clear 6 Press O f 2 Note If you do not wish to clear this Quick Dial press Oprincton twice to return to standby mode OK Press 8 Press Oprincton twice to return to standby mode 58 Prt Help List DP Function no LS Oiuuek Dial y Print List P vis Press Quick or M2345 Delete Deleted FAXING Name Dials N ame D ials are a handy way of storing fax numbers that you dial regularly in machine memory W hen you store a number in a Name D ial you must also give it a name up to 10 characters long W hen dialling you enter the first letter of this name to quickly find the N ame D ial you require Office
90. 2 pin Letter IT 81 2 x 11 Legal LG 81 2 x 14 R1 jai 297mm x 352mm x 576mm Hx Wx D E x 81 2 11 70 x13 87 x 22 69 Hx Wx D Envelopes Weight C5 162 mm x 229 mm 15 5 kg 34 18 lb Co 114 mm x 162 mm DL 110 mm x 220 mm Power Supply Other AC 220 to 240 V Transparencies 90 60 Hz Label paper Power Consumption Max Printing Average Copying Average Stand by Average PC Scan Average Sending Faxes Average Receving Faxes Average Economy Mode Dimensions Operating Environment Temperature Humidity 10 C 50 F to 35 C 95 F 15 to 80 106 Printing Specifications Printer Language PCL 5e compatible Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1200 dpi x 600 dpi enhanced Print Speed 6 ppm pages per minute Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper Paper Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 1b Interface IEEE 1284 Scanner Specifications Configuration Flatbed ADF Document Size LG Ef HLT A4 A5 B5 Optical Resolution 300dpi Scanning Resolution 1bit 100 x 100 150 x 150 200 x 200 300 x 300 400 x 400 600 x 600 dpi 8bit 300 x 300 dpi SPECIFICATIONS Resident Font Dutch 801 SWC Dutch 801 Italic SWC Dutch 801 Bold SWC Dutch 801 Bold Italic SWC Swiss 742 SWC e Swiss 742 Italic SWC e Swiss 742 Bold SWC e Swiss 742 Bold Italic SWC e Swiss 742 Condensed SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Italic SWC e S
91. 2MB SIMM Note The following are the required specifications for a SIMM used with this machine 72 pin 60ns Extend Date Out EDO parity non parity ik Important Make sure you touch some grounded metal object with your hand to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body before handling the SIMM Ls Turn off the machine FSS 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Remove the SIMM cover located on the left side of the machine Pull apart the hooks on the both sides of the SIMM board that hold it in place 23 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Carefully lift out the currently installed SIMM board 5 Angle the new SIMM board as shown in the illustration and insert it down into the slot Gently rock it back and forth until you hear it snap into place ik Important Make sure the SIMM board is oriented cor rectly when you insert it into the slot Make sure the hooks on the sides of the SIMM board snap securely into place Replace the cover by inserting its tabs into the holes provided as shown in the illustration 24 3 PRINTING AND SCANNING W hen connected to a compatible PC you can use this machine as a high performance laser printer and black and white scanner Im
92. 64 Upgrading Memory sssavssaceraGitde dchevanardenel 23 Upper paper thay aaps x 4 11 Upper Tey EXIENSION ssr r S X USET AP AIICLON enn E 100 Using the second Additional printer 28 ZOON KE nnr NN xiii Zoom In 1 increments u s 75 111 112 EE G025 ne RICOH 406 406DF Operation Manual Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference For safety please follow the instructions in this manual Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine Please read the safety information on pages i iii of this manual It contains Important Information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems Operator Safety This machine is considered a class 1 laser device safe for office EDP use The machine contains a 5 milliwat 765 805 nanometer wavelength GaAlAs laser diodes Direct or indirect reflected eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator The following label is attached on the machine This label can be found when opening the bypass tray CLASS 1 LASER
93. IALCU COVER estat ieee sete uel X POWER SOOKE a fcarstttatss eee dale Pace tee cit X POWER SWI ssia X Printer driver Windows 95 98 s n 26 O A E EEA 26 Printer driver contents Printing the dial list 9i 5s aussie coanessinoeccdvesainscorns Printing the Journal ensine Power failure report sssssssseeeeeeseessssssssssssssreee Quick Dials Clearing Quick Dial Editing Quick Dial nconsesesseraudlatacretsccar deans Sorne kD I aici es Oark DMaLRO ataa EA Receive file indicator gt 5 cach casssecscossctssssstezceiest xiv Receiving TAKES s r 46 Reception mode key cccsscssesssssesssssessssseseee X V Redialling a number ccscecsssssseesssessseesseessees 44 Reduce KeA xiii COUCH OU cccete te Giltamrtinea cede taceeteate 73 Remote CHANGE 2 905 0isskuvohstancntetysnsodisadiarnirdeens 52 Replacing Toner cassette cesvdevevsvoivsinceeescobtustenssezacentaibiee 01 Cle aii Dae nn 91 Resolution Photo setting ccccccssesssseessseesssee 76 BS A seas rca td eerste ly 68 INDEX Salet inforna simni a i SOI LOCK E EEEE TI X NOG a eA E N 4 Second Additional printer xi COCCHI E siiani Aani 16 E E ET 28 Second printer key lt x isc cess casechcsaoued tenes namoassannee XV Sendin NINES Sore ccoen a alas ncecrnelti en ls 40 Setting up Connecting to the telephone line 32 Sotware drveta etna ieee 25 DIGIC EEE AE EEES E ES 17 20 SIMM CNE snan sata eh EN X O De Nh ARRE T EPEE E AA TEE SE
94. ING e When your original is not standard size align the upper left edge of the original to the ar row mark on the scale For Type 2 Users e When the original is smaller than the paper you are copying to place a second sheet of paper that is larger than the paper you are copying to on top of the original when you place the original onto the exposure glass 2r COPYING Making Multiple Copies You can specify the number of copies to be printed by pressing Of to increase the number or QDown to reduce the number Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Up 2 Press T or on until the de sired number of copies appears 100 10 Note You can specify the number of copies in the range of Ol to 99 Start Press to perform the copy opera tion Number of Q Note copies printed so far During the copy operation the display shows Page number the number of copies printed so far and that to be printed For example 02 10 appears while the second copy ofa run of 10 copies is being printed Number of copies to be printed VD Tips Clear Modes e Press QO to clear the setting after the copying has been finished Memory Copy Sort Memory Copy Q Type 1 or O Type 2 produces copies at a faster speed but it can also result in a loss of printout quality e With a Type 2 machine using 5t MemoyCopy also activates the
95. ING Error Messages 3 3 Check fax no and Multiple attempts at Stop Press Stop communication with this Press to cancel the trans number failed mission In some locales if this number was stored in a Name Dial Quick Dial or the redial memory the number will be erased completely from the ma chine memory to comply with regulations Check the number is correctand store it again if necessary No dial tone No dial tone was detected Check the line connection and if behind a PABX the PABX set tings Set A4 paper Small size paper is loaded Load A4 size paper in the upper in the upper tray A4 size tray and register the correct pa paper is required for re per size setting ceiving faxes Set paper size The actual length of the Make sure the registered paper paper is less than the reg size matches the paper loaded istered paper length and register the correct paper size setting Error and Press An error occurred during OStop Stop reception Press Q to clear the error message and inform the other party to send their fax again Not registered Name No entry the initial letter you se rect search letter for this Name lected Dial You also can print the Dial List to see currently stored Name Dials Error XX Possible machine defect Turn power off and then back on again There is a problem with your machine If you have a prob
96. K 2 Note The actual message that appears on the ma chine s display depends on the paper source you last used If Upper Tray appears press Zoom oL or lt 9 Zoom to display the Lower Tray message before proceeding with step Ey Press OK Then press zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the correct paper size appears 6 When the correct size is on the display press OKO Registered 6 Others OK 2 GETTING OQ Lu H Z lt oO QO lt A Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Press O Finson to return to the standby display Installing the Paper Size Indicator Remove the paper size indicator Positioning the indicator so the side that shows the paper size you are using A4 or Letter is facing outwards insert it into the front of the paper tray 21 GETTING ACQUAINTED Selecting the Paper Source Kor ect 1 Press until the desired pa per source D ears 100 Ws 30 The upper paper tray is selected when U is on the display and the paper feed unit 100 Ee is selected when L is on the display GETTING ACQUAINTED Upgrading Memory You can install a Single Inline M emory M odule SIM M to upgrade the on board memory of the machine T he machine is shipped from the factory with a 4M B SIM M which can be replaced with an 8M B 16MB or 32MB SIMM U se the following procedure to install an 8M B 16M B or 3
97. Language Resident Font PCL 5e compatible Dutch 801 SWC Dutch 801 Italic SWC Print Resolution Dutch 801 Bold SWC 600 dpi x 600 dpi Dutch 801 Bold Italic SWC 1200 dpi x 600 dpi enhanced Swiss 742 SWC Print Speed Swiss 742 Italic SWC e Swiss 742 Bold SWC e Swiss 742 Bold Italic SWC Paper Media Types e Swiss 742 Condensed SWC Plain paper Swiss 742 Condensed Italic SWC Envelopes Swiss 742 Condensed Bold SWC Transparencies Swiss 742 Condensed Bold Italic SWC Label paper Incised 901 SWC Incised 901 Italic SWC Paper Weight Incised 901 Bold SWC 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Roman SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Bold 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Italic 12 pitch text SWC Hareserif 821 SWC Hareserif 821 Extra Bold SWC Ribbon 131 SWC Wingbats SWM 6 ppm pages per minute TIONS Interface IEFE 1284 lt O T A O co Scanner Specifications Configuration Grey scale Flatbed ADF 256 levels 8 bit Document Size Interface LG LI HLT A4 A5 B5 IFFE 1284 ECP mode Optical Resolution Compatibility 300dpi TWAIN ADF Scanning Resolution 1bit Up to 10 pages of 80g m 201b Plain paper 100 x 100 150 x 150 Maximum scanning size 200 x 200 30
98. Make sure the SIMM board is oriented cor rectly when you insert it into the slot Make sure the hooks on the sides of the SIMM board snap securely into place Replace the cover by inserting its tabs into the holes provided as shown in the illustration 22 3 PRINTING AND SCANNING W hen connected to a compatible PC you can use this machine as a high performance laser printer and black and white scanner Important e Make sure that your PC parallel port is set to ECP If it is not please consult your PC manual on how to change it Note e For information on PC hardware and software requirements please read the README file on the CD Printer drivers are provided for both Windows 95 98 and Windows 3 1 but the scanning feature requires Windows 95 98 Setting up Before you can start printing and scanning you need to the following if you have not done so already e Connect the machine to your PC e Install the software drivers on your PC Installing the Software Drivers Follow the steps below to install the printer scanner drivers on your PC 1 Make sure the machine is connected to your PC and paper is loaded in the upper paper tray Connecting to a computer See page 7 Oo Z H Z aa A
99. Mode Name E Configuration S Device Configuration Feeder Toner Save Mode Time out A A E Fonts oz Font Manager To add printer fonts lt E Overlays Overlay Assignments None All pages Odd Even pages First Other pages Cover Divider page Overlays Create New Overlay Manage Overlays Get files from other sources to use as overlays Send created overlays to other sources Rename overlays Remove overlays ik Important After printing a large number of pages wait a few minutes befor turning off the machine FH Note Be sure to use online help and Read me file of the printer driver to get the most out of all the printer features and functions 25 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Using the Second Printer Additional Printer Use the following procedure to switch between this machine and a second printer when a second printer is connected ik Important If the second printer has a bi directional mode make sure you turn it off Note Connecting a second printer see page 15 To print to the second printer Second Printer Press Q The Second Printer indicator lights PC Interface ik Important Whenever you change printers be sure to also change to the appropriate printer driver on your computer Note While the Second Printer Indicator is lit print data from your computer passes through the machine to the second printer Perform the required print operation with the application you are usi
100. N 73 To Set the Enlarsement Factor sivcvsctetssetet need cil indie ee 74 Zoom ie F ANCrenments Feee handel RNE 75 TOSS ZOO ini ena dine ida A 75 Adjustine he C Opy IMA se naasma a 76 To Select the Resolution Photo Setting ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 To Adjust the Image Density ccccccccsssssessseessesssssssseeeeeeeseeees 71 Setting an Original on the ADF ssssseeeseeesesssessssssssssssssssssseeererreereee 78 SO OU e a E E areca or rns 80 SONME C OPINE oie O 80 TROUBLESHOOTING GCN Cal scerna a costae aes epee eee 82 Panone and Copyn sats hsece tec etitte ue istienasenshasy duce inasssenadMeas ideas 82 Fed TAN each ct ant E tata ced lea Poach Batt 83 Copy ine anid Taxie 2226056 she cepsadonct soviet sodvaadal S 84 SC AMIN renn a ae a 86 Error NICSSA GCS erar A a eE EN 86 When the Receive File Indicator is Lit cccsssecseseeeeeeeeeeees 90 Ceann a Paper Mit eE ticcict ciated A E 91 Clearing a Feed in the Main Unitsssassare a 91 Clearing a Misteedin th ADF sn siciisioshinistien eit ates 93 Clearing a Misfeed in the Optional Paper Feed Unit 93 When Paper Will Not Feed siijciscccsccsoersnnioleseinesleieleiebindeasdanedahonnsl 94 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance aeea r r T O 96 Replacing the Toner Cassette and the Cleaning Pad 00008 97 SOTA cacao ar eceeatusnce N E osama sac ceaneshon ates 100 PIDO ses cisa tenes ys coh obeeatactca rece E 100 PONCE CaS SCS eaaa A 100 8
101. NCE S A 383 Avenue du G n ral de Gaulle BP 307 92143 Clamart Cedex Phone 33 0 1 40 94 38 38 Spain g RICOH ESPANA S A Avda Litoral Mar 12 14 08005 Barcelona Phone 34 0 93 295 7600 Italy RICOH ITALIA SpA Via della Metallurgia 12 37139 Verona Phone 39 0 45 8181500 Hong Kong RICOH HONG KONG LTD 23 F China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road Wan Chai Hong Kong Phone 852 2862 2888 Singapore RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 260 Orchard Road 15 01 02 The Heeren Singapore 238855 Phone 65 830 5888 SUPPLIES MODEL NAME The correct model name of supplies for your Bizworks is RICOH TONER CASSETTE TYPE 1120D BLACK RICOH CO LTD Ohmori NM Building 1 1 Ohmori kita 2 chome Ota ku Tokyo 143 0016 Japan Printed in the Netherlands EE AE G026 8600 i RICON Overseas Affiliates U S A RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell New Jersey 07006 Phone 1 973 882 2000 The Netherlands RICOH EUROPE B V Groenelaan 3 1186 AA Amstelveen Phone 31 0 20 5474111 United Kingdom RICOH UK LTD Ricoh House 1 Plane Tree Crescent Feltham Middlesex TW13 7HG Phone 44 0 181 261 4000 Germany RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Mergenthalerallee 38 40 65760 Eschborn Phone 49 0 6196 9060 France RICOH FRANCE S A 383 Avenue du G n ral de Gaulle BP 307 92143 Clamart Cedex Phone 33 0 1 40 94 38 38 Spain g RICOH ESPANA S A Avda Litoral Mar
102. O NS 15 U P E A EA 26 Side guide sssr 16 19 IMN OOE oessdue Ese Vili iX N aaan iiaentamensnnnsecse teas 21 Small size paper feed access panel viii ix small size papet sarctramasearsisnwenisiiescmmenmenniac 12 i E EEEE EA EA EET 5 Sort Memory Copy Type 2 only xi 28 33 SPECIFICATIONS cssssstssssieavvearsansianounatatanaros 61 o AT E eee E OT X OE jj onlantadubvoruanmaetsseamn xi BE A EE EN 53 ay oa E E E E E 33 Toner cassette Installing cececccccccccssecsecsesseestecsteseestesseeseen 2 Repa IIE oee 50 Top release lever seccsssesesssecsscsscssesessee viii ix TOU i EE A AE E T viii iX E E A 14 TROUBLESHOOTING se cosveutszsesesaeescconsnd d seecactesas 39 Te A N N ece caneeest E E viii OL VIDS E E E TE E iX Upgrading Memory sscsssssssssssssssssessesseseessase 21 Upper paper tray os viii ix 4 10 User Parane esson 56 59 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer 26 it RICOH Overseas Affiliates U S A RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell New Jersey 07006 Phone 1 973 882 2000 The Netherlands RICOH EUROPE B V Groenelaan 3 1186 AA Amstelveen Phone 31 0 20 54741 11 United Kingdom RICOH UK LTD Ricoh House 1 Plane Tree Crescent Feltham Middlesex TW13 7HG Phone 44 0 181 261 4000 Germany RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Mergenthalerallee 38 40 65760 Eschborn Phone 49 0 6196 9060 France RICOH FRA
103. OS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used here in are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks A WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cord Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an elec tric shock Also reflected eye contact with the leser beam may cause serious eye damage When the machine needs to be checked adjusted or repaired contact your service representative Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine There is a risk of fire electric shock explosion or loss of sight If the machine loo
104. S176 watered each ete 20 Speci yne he Papero ZE ercon abetnriaetis ceased oesaeiacsiatsaraaant 20 Installing the Paper Size Indicator c ccc ccesseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Selecting the Paper SOULCE sisaria a e E 22 Upsradins Momor ssai he teca ees 23 3 PRINTING AND SCANNING SETAT EA E EENE EEEE PEL E AA E PET A E E AEE aed 25 Installing the Software Divers ennniaen a a 25 Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver 0000008 27 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Printing to the Second Printer seeni A 28 4 FAXING Switching between Fax Operation and Copy Operation Mode 29 Entering Characters on the Operation Panel cccccccesssseeeeeeeeeees 30 Petite rin INU MIDIS gesinn r aceetaneaatt 30 Entering Letters Symbols and Spaces ccccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Deleting Characters and Moving the Cursor ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 31 SCN UP sis eter tetas ad aceasta acetate ataeeeans 32 Please Read This First sgscsascccivase sicennicdacsneacetiaideeseesenauieaiuds 32 Connecting to the Telephone Line ccc seseeeeeessesesseeeeeeeeeeeees 32 Storine your Own Name TTI ws sasdsecscictuvionceancshienacehisdcaesctacevaseat avons 33 Settine the Dial Mode seesdeia in an eaae A EES R 34 Storing your Own Fax Number ccccccccccccccsscsseetssssseessseseeseeeeees 36 Settine the Dateand IME sserrep i
105. SETTING UP Preparing the Output Tray 1 Pull out the output tray extension as shown A _ O Z H Lu V SETTING UP Connecting to a Computer ik Important Make sure that the power of both the machine and your computer is turned off before making the connection A Plug one end of the provided parallel B cable into the lower port on the side of the machine and secure it in place as shown in the illustration 2 Note e The machine must be connected to a computer for printing e Use the cable that comes with the machine to connect to your computer Connect the other end of the parallel cable to your computer s parallel printer port SETTING UP Choosing Where Printed Output is Delivered W here printed output is delivered depends on the position of the AD F lt Position A gt When the ADF is in the lower position copies prints and incoming faxes are delivered face up at the lower output slot Sheets stack in reverse order Oo m lt H LLI dp at lt Position B gt When the ADF is in the upper position prints and receving faxes are stacked face down and in the correct order in the output bin ik Important To avoid paper jams do not move the ADF once printing begins SETTING UP Connecting the Telephone Line and Op tional Telephone Handset T here are two similar sockets located at the rear of the machine e LINE the telephone line connect
106. Selecting the Paper Source Kew ect 1 Press until the desired pa per source spears 100 Uro The upper paper tray is selected when U is on the display and the paper feed unit 100 Et is selected when L is on the display GETTING ACQUAINTED Upgrading Memory You can install a Single Inline M emory M odule SIM M to upgrade the on board memory of the machine T he machine is shipped from the factory with a 4M B SIM M which can be replaced with an 8M B 16M B or 32MB SIMM U se the following procedure to install an 8M B 16MB or 32MB SIMM Note The following are the required specifications for a SIMM used with this machine 72 pin 60ns Extend Date Out EDO parity non parity ik Important Make sure you touch some grounded metal object with your hand to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body before handling the SIMM 1 Turn off the machine 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Remove the SIMM cover located on the left side of the machine Pull apart the hooks on the both sides of the SIMM board that hold it in place 23 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Carefully lift out the currently installed SIMM board 5 Angle the new SIMM board as shown in the illustration and insert it down into the slot Gently rock it back and forth until you hear it snap into place ik Important Make sure the SIMM board is oriented cor rectly when you insert it into the slot Ma
107. Sort feature automatically 28 COPYING Making a Book Copy When copying from a book the thickness of the book should be no more than 30mm 1 18 1 Lift the platen cover 2 Open to the page you want to copy and lay the page face down on the exposure glass Be sure to align one of the cor ners of the page with the arrow mark on the scale EJ Lower the platen cover Start Press to perform the copy op eration Oo lt gt a e O COPYING Reduction and Enlargement Reduce Enlarge Press r Q to select preset reduction or enlargement factors for the copy operation To set the reduction factor Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Reduce Press until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 93 87 82 Ls lt 71 A4 gt AD Start Ey Press to perform the copy op eration Note Clear Modes Press to clear the setting after copying 30 COPYING To set the enlargement factor Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Enlarge Press until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order i 100 gt 115 gt 122 141 tidied Start Press to perform the copy o
108. TECHNICAL REFERENCE Pinin the Help ToS otis ctor ect atuseatus A obese 101 Customising Default Settings with the User Parameters 102 Chanor the User Parameters sin casssinarsnctusdvaseadvassiavarsstavenlatatveiac 102 User Parameter Switch Summary lt scsccscscswressuerensosedeeiecadeacssigesccnsates 103 BUC OUT TA SU scariest aad a e E Soeewenero ens 106 Selectin the Lam Cua ge eresse tea aa 107 Economy OC Seca ssc scavareacec ge ro vesciel desta iotesatretosautasnouenaaeseasdseerete 108 Changing the Economy Mode ccccccccsssssssesssssesssssesseeeeeeeeeeeees 108 OP CIPLC RATIONS corren anedccesohe nate ec eicke 109 MOOK oes E renter trey terenrert a aera tt 112 Part Names Automatic Document Feeder Upper paper tray ADF Holds up to 100 sheets Holds up to 10 sheets of paper for of plain paper automatic feeding Place originals face Original guide Guides the original correctly into the ii machine Make sure Document guides your original fits under Slide the left guide to fit this guide the size of the paper you are feeding Place originals on NSS this glass face down El Exposure glass i Top unit Operation panel Key panel for F controlling the ZZ Power switch machine Turns the machine on and off Platen cover Output tray Lift this cover to access the exposure extension glass when you want to scan a page Pull out to support paper output from the machine from a book
109. Tray guide OK On OK Press OK Then press zoom or oe lt Q om until the correct paper size appears When the correct paper size is on the display press OKC 2 Note ee 6 Others p Do not carry out any operations while Reg i istered appears on the display 11 Press Ornon to return to the standby display 1 Tip If the paper feed unit option is not installed and the machine is in copy operation mode you can press Paper Select Helo Enlarge Paper Selme T in place of Function in Q Q i gt ste Next skip step Gj and E and jump directly to step E Important Be sure to specify the paper size again before copying printing or receiving faxes onto A4 or Letter size paper If you do not you will not be able to receive faxes 14 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Other Media U sethe following procedures to load envelopes transparencies and label paper Loading Envelopes Load up to 5 envelopes at a time using the same procedure for loading small size paper on page 13 e Insert envelopes print side up with the stamp position as shown e Envelope flaps should be securely folded down so the envelope is closed This is especially important when printing on envelopes with adhesive on the flaps because heat generated during the printing process can cause the adhe sive to melt and get on rollers FH Note Paper select operation see page 14 Kotole lave mi celal ele alei
110. XYZ CO E g press JS 05 ome YS 05 05 Zoom QO 05 05 05 Zoom gt P Zoom 4 gt 25 25 25 Zoom gt 65 bi 6s Zoom 4 gt P P Zoom 4 gt 9 Press OK Q I Hl x Z M D Registered Note Do not turn off the machine while Please print TASE wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display g ee Press Quick or Do one of the following To store another Quick Dial go back to step E To return to standby mode press C inclon twice To access another function press CrirF4 then enter a function number Editing Quick Dials Help Press sonar 1 Ofuncton Prt Help List P Oo Z a LL Function no 2 Press Zoom Gr Press L bs 13 Olek Dial 9 5 O1 FAXING 4 Press OK Q 5 Press the Quick Dial key you wish to edit 6 Press Zoom twice then press Pp 2 Note To clear the Lefrmost digit press Zoom Gr Clear Then press Q OK Press Q 8 Edit the name stored in this Quick Dial E g Press 25 To move the cursor press Zoom or Zoom Or 9 Press OK Q 2 Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display 10 Do one of the following To edit another Quick Dial go to step E To return to standby mode press Orach 56 l Function twice Print List P Press Quick or 234567989 128456789 1208456789 183456789 B3456789
111. a nn hleehat 97 Cleaninep dinen a usin 97 Resolution Photo setting csccscssessseessseeesseees 76 RU eeeeeres one Ctene AA 67 Safety IMO AMON sean snn i AET Ta X UnC RINE sesa AANA 4 Second Additional printer xi OTTE aTi AER EE EEE un 16 Uno ierekoine te dette satu Ratatat 28 Second printer key ca ccassssisinsetsersaieiaiwincans XV SeDdine liesan i accrccsamtenlvsceeccenans 40 Setting up Connecting to the telephone line 32 Software drive esere aie 25 ode MICE aao 17 20 SININE ONCE o i EA X SN a a ern PRET 23 Small size paper feed access panel cccesceee X Smal SIZE papii ea A 13 OIL ar neem ceta Nestea an taaanaueneneets 78 SOrt MeMOry Key ccscessesssesssssssecssssecessssseeree xiii SUAS eres ede E AE E E E 65 SPECUCAONS orsa n A 106 AK eee reacted danmseccoiaseoaees cel xii Stop KEY cacao car eosuansaccacorvsasesasrieenteieseatenccene xii Storing your own fax number sssi 36 SUA Oe areca mani EA 907 01010010 02 bg 00 oo esi i 39 AUTRAN caso E E xi 32 T E EE eter E 45 Telephonecall sessissanisrnn 50 Text Eanna AN 76 Toner cassette SGINE ara 2 REI a E N 94 Top release lever secccsssescsesssssssccscssscsccsesenecase X AKO ET 1 PAEO E e ectetam cue X Transmission result report cccccecseseeseeeeeen 63 INDEX WPATIS PANCLICICS ssania nene n onan 15 Troubleshooting viscssisctiserccncamnauasbonseum 80 MTT ETETA E EE NEE PET O A 33 Unauthorized call report
112. a second printer to this port Computer port Connect your computer here viii Type 2 Z T he following describes the Type 2 machine z Q H co _ wo Automatic document feeder Original guide ZO ADF Upper Guides the original O it Holds up to 10 sheets of paper for automatic paper tray correctly into the machine m feeding Place originals face down Make sure your original fits under this guide N S Document guides Slide the left guide to fit the size of the paper you are feeding a aN Exposure glass SF SS ES Zig Top unit Operation panel eZ J Z Power switch Output tray Platen cover extension Lift this cover to access the exposure glass when you want to scan a page from a book magazine or any other original that cannot be fed using the ADF Top release lever Output tray Document output tray Scanned documents are delivered here Scannerlock Upper tray extension N Extend to support originals Small size paper feed A access panel E i q 7 SIMM cover Power socket VA Second printer Additional Printer port Computer port Operation Panel Check Display 9 0O Note Be sure to panel the protective seet from the operation panel PC Interface Second Printer e e e Memory Copy Text Fine Photo Rhoto2 Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge Paper Select Sort Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge fF Check Display This in
113. ace the first page of your document face down on the exposure glass aligning it with the arrow mark on the scale 2 Then close the platen cover 3 Adjust the scan settings if necessary E g ifyour documentis a photograph press the Original Type Select key twice to select Photo 1 Text ne Sort Text Photo Photo bry Copy Text Fine 7 2 JEL O Photo Photographs Photo2 Mixed text and photographs Oo Z a LL To select the Resolution Photo setting see page 76 41 FAXING 5 Dial the fax number in one of the fol lowing ways On the numeric keypad E g press b 25 354 5S 6 Bp 8 Press a Quick Dial key with a number stored in it Sort Memory Copy E g press 1B Name Press Q then enter the first letter of a previ ously stored Name Dial Name E g press then press until the Name Dial you require appears Start Press If you set your document in the ADE the machine dials the fax number and sends your fax message If you set your document on the exposure glass in step KA you now need to do the following steps To select the length of your document press lt Zoom or Zoom until a suitable length appears Start 8 Press OKC or C The machine dials the fax number When the connection is established if the other party has registered it their CSI will be displayed If no CSI is registered Transmitting will appear instead Afte
114. achine checks to see if the sender s C SI is stored in any of the Quick Dials or Name Dials If it is found and you have used that Q uick D ial or Name D ial to send at least one message to that destination the message is accepted H Note You can store up to 30 Specified Senders 25 Name Dials and 5 Quick Dials To set up your machine for Authorized Reception you need to 1 Turn Authorized Reception on Make sure all the Specified Sender CSIs are stored in Quick Dials or Name Dials Ei Make sure that you have sent at least one message to all the Specified Senders using their Name Dials or Quick Dials After one message has been sent the Specified Sender is enabled and you can receive fax mes sages from them Note e turn Authorized Reception on and omit steps 2 and 3 above the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages Storing Editing and Deleting Quick Dials see page 56 Storing and Deleting Name Dials see page 61 Unauthorized Call Report see page 65 48 FAXING Turning Authorized Reception on off Press QEP 1 O function Prt Help List D gt 2 Press Zoom r Function no 21 Author RX Ok EJ Press 25 L 4 Press OKC Mode Of F Press lt S Zoom or Zoom to adjust E the setting S 6 Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the Pog sote ee function menu will reappear Note 2 Communication x Do not carry out any op
115. achine is receiving data from a connected computer lt Copying gt Sort Memory Copy key Press to change order in which your copy sets are delivered Sorting Output see page 78 Reduce key Press to reduce the size of an image when copying To Set the Reduction Factor see page 73 Enlarge key Press to enlarge the size of an image when copying To Set the Enlargement Factor see page 74 xiii GENERAL Z O H oC Q Y Lu OQ Check Display Busy Receive File i PC Interface Sort o e ee gt gt gt M C Text Text Photo Photo TEL FAX Second Printer EA Fine 1 2 O XO n Light Paper Select key Reception Mode key Press to select the copy paper size When the optional paper feed unit is installed press to switch between paper sources lt Faxing gt 6 Receive File indicator Lights to let you know there is received fax data in memory that could not be printed for some reason Substitute Reception page 45 Quick Dial keys XIV In fax operation mode press one of these keys once to recall a fax or telephone number you have stored beforehand In copy operation mode these keys have different uses Quick Dials see page 53 Press to choose whether the machine should answer all calls automatically Choosing the Reception Mode see page 45 4 Name key Press to recall a fax or telephone number stored in a Name Di
116. aded Correctly load the toner cassette correctly into the machine If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Machine is out of toner Replace the toner cassette Clear paper Paper misfeed or paper Remove the misfed paper If a will not feed at all copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again If paper persistently misteeds carry out the procedure on page 89 Memory overflow Not enough memory Either lower the printer driver capacity PC printing Resolution setting or increase only memory capacity by installing a larger SIMM Press any opera tion panel key to clear the error message from the display Remove a ae misfeed o paper Remove the original from the when original is set ll not feed at all ADE Ifa copyjob is in progress in ADF set the eop quantity again Memory full and Too much sort copy data P23 78 u Dress Stop PY Press to cancel sort copying If you need to print big copy jobs increase the memory capacity a Too many sort copy pages Start Press to print pages al ready stored in memory To can Stfop cel the job press O If you need to print big copy jobs in crease the memory capacity 84 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 2 3 Transm error and An error occurred during Press Stop transmission or the other line was busy If power was lost during the dialing or connecting phases of transmission or in fax t
117. age 34 Own Fax Number see page 36 Date and Time see page 38 In addition you may wish to adjust the following Selecting the Language see page 107 Summer Time Daylight Saving Time see page 39 The volume of sounds the machine makes see page 66 If you wish to share the line with a telephone handset you may need to change the reception mode Choosing a Reception Mode see page 46 Connecting to the Telephone Line T here are two similar sockets located at the rear of the machine e LINE the telephone line connection e TEL for an optional handset when sharing the line with a telephone 1 Insert the line cable into the LINE socket at the rear of the machine A Connect the other end of the line cable to your telephone line 32 Storing your Own Name TII Store your name or name of your organisation W hen you send a fax this identification appears at the top of the page when printed at the other end It is also shown on the other party s display during communication It can be up to 32 characters long Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xii 30 z 2L zZ Ifyou do not want this identification printed on faxes you send see Page Header on page 68 Help 1 Press Function Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no 16 Own name TTI Ey Press b 65 4 Press OK Enter your name or name of your organisation HEL Ea press OS OS zm
118. al Name Dials see page 58 5 Pause Redial key Press this key in fax standby mode to recall the last number dialled While entering a fax number press this key to enter a pause shown on the display as a hyphen On Hook Dial key Press this key to establish a connection with the telephone line connected to the machine for dialing On Hook see page 51 r e H i QO ZO Helo E ach ame ABC DEF oae D y Zoom OL le SS D amp ae Modes A Pause be D o 1S BY 65 os ost Hook T ie PQRS TU WXYZ Auto Image Density o 8 O ox I Lighter Darker Clear O O fe AP H l 6 lt Printing gt Second Printer key Press this key to select between printing to this machine indicator off and printing to a second printer connected to the machine indicator on XV This page is intentionally blank 1 SETTING UP Package Contents M ake sure that all of the items shown in the Package C ontents sheet that comes with the machine are included A WARNING o Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flowerpots glasses on the machine Ifthe contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur 1 SETTING UP A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not p
119. al letter you rect search letter for this Name selected Dial You also can print the Dial List to see currently stored Name Dials 88 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 4 4 Error 90 Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock turn the P4 machine off and then back on P9 Error XX Possible machine defect e machine defect Possible machine defect Tum power off and then back There is a problem with ee your machine If you have a problem with the machine and you cannot resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter please contact your service representative If an Error XX message is displayed be sure to turn off the machine before calling 89 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING When the Receive File Indicator is Lit T his indicator lights to inform you that a page of an incoming fax message could not be printed for some reason e g paper has run out and that page has been stored in memory ik Important The machine cannot receive any more messages until you solve the problem Turning off the power will erase any message stored in memory To print the page out check the display and rectify the problem e g paper has run out When the problem is resolved the page will automatically be printed out 2 Note If there is not enough memory all or some parts of the message will not be stored or printed The machine will only store a page in memory if a problem occurs wh
120. aniorrasmnsacnsnnnnans 30 PINOT PAS da sccrsrscteadeesencte mavens teh aaa 42 PATINS WOES rea te Race Se eho 42 EMVEl OPES err E 15 Eror MESIS i A ONN 84 anG E0 e EEEE E 64 Exposure glass sssssssssssseeeeeeeessssssssssssssssrerrerernns x PAN CODY KOV ressos ieee aisn xii FAN MOE ar EE 46 FAK ODCPALON rer tien et rcpecesae ca eae 29 Front CUNO ssssd ea 17 19 ED S A E amnion 98 Fle lf PUGH ON ee ER xii Iae dD eaan tune il Installing Document output tray winds contunirstiinceccaiin 5 DOL ALG ATIVO en S 25 TONE CASSE a anssesbuasacacceeneeee 2 Upper paper tray sssri 4 kabel pano asee 15 ANEU ens a enn ecatteibtedteeer de 104 MM HAIG erana 11 17 19 Lines slow 4800 bps s 66 MOGI Gs PaPe aono E E 11 109 INDEX Loading Plan DADC a 11 Small size PAP CEs asussedsratinmsesnautetiatsbonbtes 13 det lat 01 dE aeeeneeoreemesesnsiy te tiveres eeeetec ert Tana 15 LOCAU Menasi a l Metal p AE i NS 17 19 IVI ISCO IES rsa 72 NJ NAME KEY A E E E xiv Name Dials Deleting Name Dial aia ionessic itis ccs 60 Dialling Name Dial s s 6l Storing Name Dial s s s 58 Numeri keypad c cccessssscssssescssscsesssesscssssensease xij OR KET ia E E xiii ON MOOK aio EO oe 51 On OOK didl Key sssssssrssscossseaiessssudinnelencoien xiv Operation Panel ca2ssssarsusecaesbecat eer tiamee X xii xiv Original Settioo CADE asana n 40 69 Requirements ADF ccsssscssesssesseesseeeseen 78 RIS TAI ides
121. ansmis sion fails T he following information is given e From Owner the sender s fax number identification e To the receiver s fax number identification e Date Time when the communication failure happened Duration how long the communication lasted Reason for error Power Failure Report If power is lost while sending a message receiving a message or while a message has been stored in memory when the Receive File indicator is lit this report will be printed out when power is restored When the Receive File Indicator is lit see page 47 Unauthorized Call Report If you have set up Authorized Reception and turned this report on a report is printed if an unauthorized sender tries to send you a message By default this report is turned off Turn it on with the U ser Parameters Authorized Reception see page 47 Oo lt a LL User Parameters see page 102 T he following items are recorded e From the fax number id of the sender e Date Time when they tried to send the message FAXING Advanced Features Making Machine Sounds Louder or Quieter T his machine makes various sounds during operation You can adjust the vol ume of these sounds or turn them off completely according to your taste You can change the following e TX the sound of a fax being sent e RX the sound of a fax being received e On Hook sounds made when using the On Hook feature e Dialling tones you
122. aper SOULCE si jiss sci ciesihitonndeadnted a a Ze Uperadine Memory sica ae treme tne iret erren neers ieer er er 23 3 PRINTING AND SCANNING SS UUM MAD act savin acta sashes dha canesberenen dou a A ans 25 Installing the Software Drivers ccccccccssssesesseeeeeesseseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver 0005 27 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer c ccs eeeeeeseeeeeees 28 Printing to the Second Pone rerai 28 4 FAXING Switching between Fax Operation and Copy Operation Mode 29 Entering Characters on the Operation Panel cccsssseesseeeeeeeeees 30 Poterne Numbers seee a a a 30 Entering Letters Symbols and Spaces ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Deleting Characters and Moving the Cursor ccccceccccesteeeeteees 31 CUE OUP Sco sale eal aan ee anatiathin EE RE 32 Please Read Pianist Geis sctc st tence steatcaase a tare 32 Connecting to the Telephone Line srair a 32 Stonne your Own IN amie PRD ss sacteiniect lai ra 33 Seine the Dial MOC nus 34 Storing your Own Fax Numbet siiin iay 36 sete the Date and Ime rcis 38 Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off 39 SC TIN AK CS ia steerer ascites T aacales tated ienenens 40 How TO SONG a Fax arenekenei anneni S 40 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers cccccccccsseeeeeeees 42 Paterno PAWS CS iat san sastyeere dated siae suc siecs senta
123. aper Tray oooeeeeeeeeessessssssssssssssssssssserrrreereee 4 Preparing the Output Tray c ccecessessssseeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 5 Connectins toa Computer aisse E 6 Choosing Where Printed Output is Delivered cc cceeseeeeeees 7 Connecting the Telephone Line and Optional Telephone Handset 8 mumm On the Mae nine sen Bie eas Setek de ian 9 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper dnd Omer Medias coscceiuec tte atiss sileed Usee Miah tus atten 10 EO ACI Paperone shassetadeaces nate es O a ta rawae 11 Loading Plain Paper into the Upper Paper Tray 11 Koadme Small Size Paper oresrin rn a tener ty heer yer erie 13 L adins Other Med asst acest blah a a essed readied 15 koadine BTiVelO Pes Gie I i aati 15 Loadins Transparencies vise ccaisytadecechsescieaasasewersaseuatt iavgatianiceatanicects 15 Iroadding Label Pape Pesene snes tied adieu iasucnt ances 15 Second Additional Printer ccc ceccccceeccceeeecceessseeesecseeeesseeneeess 16 Connecting toa Second Printer ssecenssgreiia tans aes taney eautaasns 16 Paper Peed UMIE ODUON orseson a cla cliietes alesis 17 Paper Feed Unit Part Naes scriescene aA As 17 Installine the Paper Feed Unitesi cancers 17 Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 19 Changin the Paper SIZE cedis ea e isemnanesents 20 Specie ePaper SiZ Ensi n A 20 Installing the Paper Size Indicator ccc cesseeesseeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Selechiie the P
124. aper feed unit and pull the paper tray out of the unit 2 After removing all tapes and cardboard from inside of the paper tray insert the tray back into the machine until it locks into place Locate the paper feed unit where you plan to use the machine R Note Be sure to place the paper feed unit ona level surface GETTING ACQUAINTED The machine has handhold at the loca tions shown in the illustration Note that the illustration shows the machine as viewed from above e This illustration shows the handhold lo cation on the right side of the machine e This is the handhold location on the left side of the machine Of ZE Es u S OG Nz 4 Carefully lower the machine onto the paper feed unit making sure that the dowels on the paper feed unit fit into holes in the bottom of the machine properly A CAUTION When lifting the machine make sure your hands are at the locations indicated by x in the illustration This protects against pinching your fingers between the machine and paper feed unit Note After the above installation attach the power cord to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet Refer to page amp for details 17 GETTING ACQUAINTED To load paper into the paper feed unit You can load either A4 or Letter size paper into the paper feed unit Refer to page 19 for details on how to change the positions of the paper guides inside of the tray to matc
125. aper tray insert the tray back into the machine until it locks into place Locate the paper feed unit where you plan to use the machine 2 Note Be sure to place the paper feed unit ona level surface GETTING ACQUAINTED The machine has handholds at the lo cations shown in the illustration Note that the illustration shows the machine as viewed from above e This illustration shows the handhold lo cation on the right side of the machine e This is the handhold location on the left side of the machine Carefully lower the machine onto the paper feed unit making sure that the dowels on the paper feed unit fit into holes in the bottom of the machine properly A CAUTION When lifting the machine make sure your hands are at the locations indicated by x in the illustration This protects against pinching your fingers between the machine and paper feed unit FH Note After the above installation attach the power cord to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet Refer to page 8 for details Loading Plain Paper in to the Upper Paper Tray see page 11 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit You can load either A4 or Letter size paper into the paper feed unit Refer to page 20 for details on how to change the positions of the paper guides inside of the tray to match the type of paper you are using 1 Pull out the paper tray and remove it from the paper feed uni
126. aphs Photo2 Copying mixed text and photographs Note If the memory size of your machine is 4MB the machine automatically switches from Photo2 to Photo in the following cases Memory Co Sort M C when the O x Type 1 or eae Oo lt gt a e O Type 2 key is on when you make multiple copies using the ADF Type 2 only Start Press to perform the copy op A eration D St art a coy Mod Press SNOT to clear the setting after copying 33 COPYING To adjust the image density 1 Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press the Density key to select the im age density settings Auto Image Density Lighter O Darker Q Select Lighter to make the image lighter Auto Image Density LighterO Darker Q Select Darker to make the image darker Auto Image Density Lighter Darker Start Press to perform the copy op SA eration Start Note Press ee er to clear the setting after copying 34 COPYING Setting an Original on the ADF Type 2 only You can load up to 10 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 Ib at atime into the Automatic D ocument Feeder AD F ik Important Check to make sure that the ADF cover is securely closed before using it 1 Fan the stack of originals Never try to place more than 10 sheets of plain
127. apping them on a desk or tabletop 3 Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide 4 Squeeze the tray guide and slide it against the edge of the stack GETTING ACQUAINTED Press er 5 Ofuncton Prt Help List g Press Zoom Function no 61 Tray Pap Size Press 6s b i Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size EJ Press OK Q bA Tray guide OK OK 9 Press OK Then press Zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the correct paper size appears When the correct paper size is on the dis play press Ok Q If the paper feed unit option page 17 is installed you can also select its paper size at this time 6 Others Ox Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Registered 11 Press Oprincton to return to the standby display Ve Tip If the paper feed unit option is not N installed and the machine is in co Enlarge PaperSelme SDP JTO 0D operation mode you can press Hel e Paper selec in place of O Finson in step E Next skip step Gj and E4 and jump directly to step Ey GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Small Size Paper Rd Note We recommend that you always feed small size paper vertically with the shorter edge feeding into the machine first 1 Remove all paper before
128. as a screwdriver or tweezers as this may damage the unit Ff Note If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part of the machine Check all areas described in this section Clearing a Feed in the Main Unit C Raise the document trap 2 Lift up the tabs located on the sides of the machine and open the front unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette FH Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 88 Push back the blue paper release lever located on the right A Note The lever releases pressure on the paper If you do not push it back you could damage the machine when removing paper Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations H Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure Clearing a Micffeed in the Optional Paper Feed Unit see page 90 e If toxner gets on your hands wash them immediately Install the toner cassette into the ma chine a Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner Installing the toner cassette see page 2 6 Close the front unit a Note If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part o
129. ations of the slots for in sertion of the upper paper tray on both sides 2 To install the upper paper tray press down on both sides of the tray making sure that it is inserted as far as it will go FH Note Paper will not be fed correctly into the ma chine if the upper paper tray is not inserted all the way in SETTING UP Other Settings for Type 2 To remove the protective sheet Open the ADF cover and then re move the protective sheet 1 SETTING UP Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place Look at the rear of the machine to con firm where the document output tray should fit 2 Insert the pin at one side of the tray by gently bending the document tray until it fits in the insert hole SETTING UP Make sure the small pieces of plastic film curl upwards as shown ik Important The original will not be delivered properly if the films are not set as shown To pull out the output tray extension as shown SETTING UP Connecting to a computer ik Important Make sure that the power of both the machine and your computer is turned off before making the connection 1 Plug one end of the your parallel cable into the lower port on the side of the Figen 5 machine and secure it in place as shown pie g in the illustration Note m e The machine must be connected to a com Z puter for printing Use the cable that comes wi
130. ay When the tray of the paper feed unit option is pulled out or pushed back into the machine l lt q L L O Lu H 00 REFERENCE When the front unit is opened When an original is set in or removed from the ADF On initiation of fax operations such as fax reception lifting the headset etc On initiation of PC printing 6M e When a key on the operation panel is pressed to turn the heater on the key does not perform its normal function e After the heater is turned back on the previous quantity Sort settings en tered fax number original type and various other settings are cleared Changing the Economy Mode Hold down the Clear modes key for approximately 1 second until the Economy mode indicator lights or goes out as required Economy Mode ON Economy Mode OFF N Nnomy Economy Mode DEF g Node Clear Modes Clear Modes 105 9 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Paper Capacity Machine Life Upper tray 30 000 sheets 5 years plain paper 80 g m 20 lb 100 sheets Optional paper unit Printer Duty plain paper 80 g m 20 lb 250 sheets 6 000 sheets 1 month ADF Auto Document Feeder Capacity plain paper Scanner Duty A4 IT LG 80 g m 20 lb 10 sheets 2 000 sheets 1 month Output tray plain paper 80 g m 20 lb 50 sheets Paper Sizes Plain paper Memory A4 210 mm x 297 mm 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16MB or 32MB A5 148 mm x 210 mm EDO SIMM 60 ns 7
131. bed on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cord Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do notremove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an elec tric shock Also reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage When the machine needs to be checked adjusted or repaired contact your service representative Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine There is a risk of fire electric shock explosion or loss of sight If the machine looks damaged or breaks down smoke is coming out there is a Strange smell or anything looks unusual immediately turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall Do not continue using the machine in this condition Contact your service representative If metal liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord Contact your service representative Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect Do not put
132. cale Close the platen cover 2 Press the Density key to select the im age density Select Lighter to make the image lighter Select Darker to make the image darker Start Press to perform the copy op eration H Note Clear Mod Press SNOS to clear the setting after copying 34 Auto Image Density LighterO Darker Q Auto Image Density Lighter O Darker COPYING Setting an Original on the ADF Type 2 only You can load up to 10 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 Ib at atime into the Automatic D ocument Feeder AD F ik Important Check to make sure that the ADF cover is securely closed before using it 1 Fan the stack of originals Never try to place more than 10 sheets of plain pa per onto the ADE 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top EJ Place the stack of originals face down on the ADF and slide the document guide against the side of the stack Note The side of the original to be copied should be face down Z gt a e O er 4 Insert the stack of originals along the document guide into the ADE H Note Insert your stack of originals into the ADF until it stops If you do not push it right in the machine will not detect the stack COPYING 5 Stretch the extend tray that supports the originals Start 6 Press C to perform the copy op era
133. ce P Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette 54 USER MAINTENANCE Storage Z lt cr TT V To Paper Paper should always be stored properly Improperly stored paper might result in poor image reproduction creased copies or paper misfeeds G en erally avoid paper curling and absorption of moisture TENANCE e Avoid storing paper in humid areas In high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity conditions store paper in a vinyl bag Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat Store on a flat surface e Use older stock first Do not lay heavy objects on paper Keep open reams of paper in the package and store as you would unopened paper Toner Cassette Keep the toner cassette inside the packaging thatit comes packed in whenever itis removed from the machine Store horizontally in a cool dark place Never store a toner cassette where it will be exposed to heat Do not lay heavy objects on the toner cassette CAUTION Keep toner cassettes out of children s reach 5 O1 7 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Printing the Help List You can print out the help list 1 While the machine is not performing any other operation press Ohrinction The message Prt Help List appears 2 Press OKC Start Ey Press C to print the Help List Note Print on A4 Letter or Legal paper 56
134. city Transm error and An error occurred during Press Stop transmission or the other line was busy message If power was lost during the dialing or connecting phases of transmission or in fax transmission standby mode this message will appear when you next turn the machine on Too many numbers Either the maximum Delete some Name Dials or number of Name Dials have enter a shorter number been stored 25 or you tried to enter more than 40 digits for a destination fax number 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING Stop Press O to clear the error No connection The line is busy while dial When scanning from the ADE ling connection failed you the machine will automatically dialled the wrong number enter redial mode To cancel or there is no answer redialling remove your document from the ADE No loop current The line current was not Check the line connection detected the line may not be connected Printer in use The machine is busy print Wait until it has nished and try ing again Machine busy The machine is busy com Wait until the current a municating has finished and iene again 87 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 8 4 Name exists The name you input for Either use a different name or P59 this Name Dial already ex delete the other Name Dial and ists try again The machine is unable to print the report or list be Press Oo to exit
135. computer in order to meet FCC emission limits WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT Declaration of Conformity RICOH Bizworks 406 406DF RICOH CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place West Caldwell New Jersey 07006 973 882 2000 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CANADA Class B This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Safety Information W hen using your machine the following safety precautions should always be followed Types of warnings used in this manual A WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death A CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property Symbol examples AN The A symbol means a situation that requires you take care Q The symbol means you MUST NOT carry out this operation This example means Do not take apart Z The symbol means you MUST perform this operation This example means You must remove the wall plug Microsoft Windows and MS D
136. conomy Mode Default delay Recycled paper Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled paper types that may be used in this machine Contents Sdtety Ti EOE ACI OM scrotal cd cates as caldacinces N 1 Enere w Sak PLOT AM sse a A Iv PEGS MVC See cite asacihea said dessa sasecsta cio cassttas Osea nag soe caneusecacecstaewetoatecencectenees Vill OPTa Pane oreraa emer en ey Merry tee me sreet rent ace ame NE MEN rar npr X 1 SETTING UP PACK aCe Content Seunen E E l EOcaNO Mennie a RE l Installing the Starter Toner Cassette cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 2 Unlocking the Scanner LOCK cccccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeasaeeeeeeees 3 Installing the Upper Paper Tayna senders dencanennsanes 4 Other Sethinss for Type 2rener isi A 5 Toremove The Protecuve Shee beknegne dy sasewlasarabiavadosanceds 5 To install the document Output tray ccc ccesesseseessseesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 To pull out the output tray extension ccc ssseeeeesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 COMnectine o a Computer Jense nne aed aavseuest topes 7 Turne OME MICE e een tens teenir ar eer aTe eeeenen seneren teins Or tre te gt 8 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper and Other Wiens esccisncoteaddateresteteceasseiasasnartviacshavientsiutedslilen 9 Eoading Paper voc xiscicrictaciecic tiniest noe acnenine mre 10 To load plain paper into the upper paper tray c ccceeeceeeeeeees 10 TO Toad
137. d a PABX you have to dial an access code to access outside numbers insert a pause between the access code and the telephone number e For international numbers enter a pause after the country code Pause T t z f b ee a Q T he pause is shown on the display as a character Entering Tones Some organisations offer you special services by tdephone which you can access using Touch Tone or DT MF tones To enter a tone press the gt or keys Setting the Dial Mode see page 34 42 FAXING Redialling a Number T he machine remembers the last fax or telephone number dialled with the numeric keys a Quick Dial or a Name Dial To redial a fax number follow the procedure below FH Note e If you dialled the last number with a Quick Dial or Name Dial the number will be displayed instead of the stored label e You cannot redial a number dialled with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode 2 Set your document Pause Redial EJ Press O Start 4 Press C Continue the standard procedure for sending a fax Automatic Redial If the machine cannot connect to the other party for some reason e g the line is busy when sending a document it will wait a while and then attempt to dial again T his will be repeated until the connection is made or the redial count maximum is reached 2 Note The redial interval and count maximum vary according to your locale g Z a
138. d by your machine By default it is printed automatically after every 35 commu nications You can print it out whenever you wish to check on machine usage or to find out if a communication was successful or not T he following items are included on the Journal e Own name this machine s Own name TTI identification e Transmission list of recent fax transmissions from this machine e Reception list of recent fax messages received by this machine e Date and Time when the communication took place e Address the fax number identification of the other party e Duration how long the communication took e Page how many pages the message contained e Result whether the communication completed successfully For how to turn automatic printing of the Journal on off see User Parameters see page 100 Help Press ee 1 QFinction Prt Help List 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press ls b 41 Journal ry Press OK Q Press Start Start Press C jgu agile gt waits he egos 62 FAXING Printing the Dial List Print this list to check on the names and numbers of Q uick D ials and N ame D ials stored in the machine You can print the D ial list using the procedure below or when storing Q uick Dials T he following items are included on the D ial List e Own name this machine s Own name TTI identification e Own fax number this machine s fax number e Quick Dial list of Quick Dial labels and nu
139. d supplies A CAUTION When replacing the toner cassette and cleaning pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very not Open the box of the new toner cassette and check to make sure it contains a toner cassette and cleaning pad 8 Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its han dle Pull the top release lever G1 and open the top unit 50 USER MAINTENANCE Holding the toner cassette by its han Z dle and pull it out zt Z nE FP Note wi Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid k To spilling the toner 4 Remove the old cleaning pad V re y Ry Note Be sure to grasp the green handle when re moving the cleaning pad 5 Insert the new cleaning pad into place NNa by grasping the green handle VAN 6 Press down gently but firmly on both sides of the pad to make sure that it is inserted as far as it can go Do not forget to install the cleaning pad whenever you install a new toner cassette ZN Pa h Prepare the new toner cassette Hold ing the toner cassette by its handle gen tly shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside PH Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle T 51 USER MAINTENANCE Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration
140. de of the toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine Ff Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 10 To close the front unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it un til the top unit closes and clicks securely into place P Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette 96 USER MAINTENANCE 2 O Q D Paper Paper should always be stored properly Improperly stored paper might result in poor image reproduction creased copies or paper misfeeds G en erally avoid paper curling and absorption of moisture e Avoid storing paper in humid areas In high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity conditions store paper in a vinyl bag Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat Store on a flat surface Use older stock first Do not lay heavy objects on paper Keep open reams of paper in the package and store as you would unopened paper TENANCE Z lt cr TT V N Toner Cassette Keep the toner cassette inside the packaging thatit comes packed in whenever itis removed from the machine Store horizontally in a cool dark place Never store a toner cassette where it will be exposed to heat Do not lay heavy objects on the toner cassette CAUTION Keep toner cassettes out of children s reach 9 N 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Printing the Hel
141. des or registering various information such as your own fax number To enter digits P 05 press the appropriate key on the numeric keypad E g to enter the number 12345678 press 2 lt 3 45 55 65 E 12345078 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 43 Entering Letters Symbols and Spaces W hen the display asks you enter a name you can use the numeric keypad to enter characters and symbols To enter a character press the appropriate key on the numeric keypad until the character appears Then press the zoom oL key to move the cursor forward gt fomm ey Space 0 2 amp o 30 FAXING H Note Some special characters in lower case appear identical in upper case on the display due to space limitations These characters are printed correctly on lists and reports Deleting Characters and Moving the Cursor W hen entering names and storing numbers Clear e To delete the character to the left of the cursor press Q Note Clear If the cursor is at the far left of the display pressing Q deletes the whole name and number e To move the cursor left press the lt 9 Zoom key e To move the cursor right press the Zoom OL key Oo lt a LL 31 FAXING Setting up Please Read This First Before you can send or receive faxes you must connect the machine to a telephone line and store the following settings Own Name TTI see page 33 Dial Mode see p
142. desired paper size ik Important Whenever you change the paper size be sure to also specify the paper size using the procedure below Specifying the Paper Size After you install the paper feed unit option you can select between the upper paper tray and the paper feed unit as the paper source and specify the size of paper in the paper feed unit Press Vek 1 QFinction Prt Help List Prt Help List Press Zoom FUNCCION Nowe na Press 65 b i 6l Tray Pap Size GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Press OK Q 2 Note The actual message that appears on the ma Lower Tray R chine s display depends on the paper source you last used If Upper Tray appears press Zoom OL or lt 9 Zoom to display the Lower Tray message before proceeding with step amp 5 Press OK Then press Zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the correct paper size appears A4 gt 6 When the correct size is on the display press KQ Registered GH Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg 6 Others Ox istered appears on the display 2 GETTING Q LLI F Z lt O O lt Press Ohinchon to return to the standby display Installing the Paper Size Indicator Remove the paper size indicator Positioning the indicator so the side that shows the paper size you are using A4 or Letter is facing outwards insert it into the front of the paper tray 21 GETTING ACQUAINTED
143. dicator lights up to alert you to read the message on the display 2 PC Interface This indicator lights while the machine is receiving data from a connected computer 3 Second Printer Pressing this key switches between printing on the machine Second Printer indicator off and printing on a second printer connected to the machine Second Printer indicator on 4 Reduce Press this key to reduce an image during copying Available reduction ratios are 50 65 77 93 and LGL gt LTR 5 Enlarge Press this key to enlarge an image during copying Available enlargement ratios are 121 129 155 200 and LTR gt LGL 6 Paper Select Press this key to specify the paper size When the paper feed unit option is installed press this key to switch between paper sources O Density key Press this key to select the image density settings Darker Auto Lighter Quantity keys Press these keys to specify the number of copies or to change numeric values on the display Start Press this key to start an operation Up Quantity Down Auto Image Density Lighter Darker Stop Press this key to interrupt the current ongoing procedure and return to the stand by state This key operates as a kind of escape key Holding down this key for 3 seconds resets the printer mode D Economy Mode Clear Modes key Pressing this key cancels the ongoing operation and clears the settings
144. e appears 1 Tray Pap Size 3 User Param 2 Language 2 GETTING m Lu H S lt O lt GETTING ACQUAINTED 3 Press OK Q 2 Note The actual message that appears on the machine s display depends on the paper Lower Tray OK source you last used If Upper Tray appears press Zoom OL or lt 9 Zoom to display the Lower Tray message before proceeding with step E 4 After pressing OK Q press Zoom G l or lt Q Zoom until the desired size ap pears Letter 81 2 x 11 lt A4 When the correct size is on the display E press OK Registered appears esistere To install the paper size indicator Break off the paper size indicator 1 Positioning the indicator so the side that shows the paper size you are using A4 or Letter is facing outwards insert it into the front of the paper tray Letter 8t 2 X 11 P To select the paper source Paper Select 1 Press until the desired pa 100 U 01 per sourc appears The upper paper tray is selected when U is on the display and the paper feed 1005 L 01 unit is selected when L is on the dis play Note Refer to page 10 for details on using the upper paper tray 20 GETTING ACQUAINTED Upgrading Memory You can install Single Inline M enory M odule SIM M to upgrade the on board memory of the machine T he machine is shipped from the factory with a 4M B SIM M which can be replaced
145. e Copies ccccccsseeceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaeaeeeeeeeseees 28 Makine a BOOK COPY serade rea a 29 Reduction and Enlargement ccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesseeeeeees 30 TOSCUMhe TECUCIIOMTACLON noiai E 30 TO Sette enlar semen TAC Ol cacsiscectuseities ace mets alte dae eeeates 31 Zoom D l Po nere ment macstie sii na A 32 MOISE ZOOM Process estate aaa lett cet elon teeta 32 Adj stine the Copy Mag Essie i aE 33 To select the resolution photo Setting csseseeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 TO AdjUSETNG imase density resama as 33 Setting an Original on the ADF Type 2 only cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 Sorting Output Type 2 Only scere 37 TO Tui onne ON aNd OM ain ncn atouiteaseuetaaneamsaetanss 37 TROUBLESHOOTING General problems printing copying scanning and Error massages 39 Clearer Paper Misfeed jivxb sist t ea tors tetra ohn a 44 Paper FCCC UN enei A E al 48 When paper will not 166d resasiccoriso Bei eds etait 49 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance nernet i e NA 5I Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad ee 32 OE scence encase cade aaudate asennad nesupadate sate taneaseecoueauesengteesaesan duataets 55 ig Sle E AORE E rene E ene ec etre E E T 55 ROME CASS IE N 55 7 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Petrie the Help Lis eeren a E i 56 Selec ns the Tal CUAS e coedoreoa ae iiaa 57 Selecine 300 dprOr GOO d Dikes a 58 Ske ai0 o 10h EM O
146. e Energy Star Guidelines intend to establish an international energy saving system for developing and introducing energy efficient office equipment to deal with environmen tal issues such as global warning This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with printing equipment by means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode Low Power Mode This machine automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after the last printing job has been completed To exit Low Power mode press any key on the operation panel The machine returns to the ready condition in about 22 seconds To change the low Power delay see page 58 Specification Te Power consumption 15 W Low Power Mode p aw Economy Mode Default delay Recycled paper Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled paper types that may be used in this machine Contents Sdiety M Orma ON Ray ever ene ene een ote emcee rere revere ne eoa 1 Fnerey Star prosta cozsnstbaateiccsccencasniasacastousesstcessenaneacsasacesnscoeiavente IV General Desci OM sepa E a vili Ome OME ANG eae E E X 1 SETTING UP Pac ee CONO e E A sees l LOCO e E E A E E E l Installing the Starter Toner Cassette cccccccccecceceeeesesnssseseeeeeseees 2 Unlocking the Scanner LOCE esac tessstetentasnacncasscaemvnaatanuesarbecastieumssssers 3 Installing the Upper Paper Tray ecse Oor Series FOP Tye 2 ea 5 To remove the protec
147. e features a port that you can useto connect your current printer as a second printer additional printer Once you do you have a selection of this machine or the second printer at the touch of O Printer key Note Make sure that the power of your computer is turned off before making the con nection To connect to a second printer 1 Turn off both the machine and your sec ond printer Connect one end of a parallel interface cable to your second printer Connect the other end of the cable to g R the second printer port securing itin TTI printer p g ee ES place with the screws o Q Note e It requires a standard 36 pin parallel cable compliant with IEEE 1284 e Refer to page 26 for details on using the sec ond printer 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED GETTING ACQUAINTED Installing the Paper Feed Unit Option T his section describes how to install the paper feed unit option and how to load paper in it Addition of a paper feed unit provides you with a second paper source that holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or Letter size paper ik Important Make sure that machine power is turned off and that the power cord is unplugged from the power socket before installing the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit Part Names Q Front guide 2 Side guide 3 Limit mark 4 Paper size indicator Connector 6 Corner guides Metal plate 1 Remove all the packing tapes from the p
148. e paper feed unit option is installed press this key to switch between paper sources O Density key Press this key to select the image density settings Darker Auto Lighter Quantity keys Press these keys to specify the number of copies or to change numeric values on the display Start Press this key to start an operation Oo Q Economy Mode GENERAL Clear Modes Z O _ oc Q Y Lu OQ Up Quantity a Auto Image Density Lighter Darker D Note Be sure to peel the protective sheet from the operation panel Stop Help Function Press this key to interrupt the current ongoing procedure and return to the stand by state This key operates as a kind of escape key Holding down this key for 3 seconds resets the printer mode 41 Economy Mode Clear Modes key Pressing this key cancels the ongoing operation and clears the settings of the current mode to their initial defaults Holding down this key for about one second switches the Economy Mode on and off Refer to Economy Mode on page 58 2 OK Press this key to execute an operation that is prompted by a message on the display 3 Zoom Press these keys to tune the preset reduction and enlargement factors to the exact value you want Press this key and then input a function number to perform various settings and list printing functions 5 Copy Mode key Press this key to speci
149. e standby state To reset printer Fax Copy key mode hold down this key for at Press to switch between fax operation mode and copy operation mode The indicators to the left of this key show which mode the machine is currently in Numeric keypad Use these keys to enter the number of copies dial a fax number or specify values 4 Clear key Press to delete the character to the left of the display cursor When the cursor is located at the far left position pressing this key deletes all of the input characters when programming functions only Start key Press to start copying or begin sending or receiving a fax xii least 3 seconds Economy Mode Clear Modes key Pressing this key clears any selected settings to their defaults and cancels the ongoing operation Hold down this key for more than about 3 seconds to turn Economy mode on or off Economy Mode see page 108 Economy Mode indicator Lights when Economy mode is turned on Help Function key Use to print the Help List Press once and enter a number for access to various function settings Printing the Help List see page 101 Auto Image Density Lighter Darker Zoom keys In copy mode press these keys to fine tune the preset reduction and enlargement ratios Also use to select function settings and navigate the function menus d OK key Press to enter values or execute an operation when prompted by
150. e the front unit The machine has been set Turn Authorized Reception off p 17 up to only receive faxes with function 21 or read how to from certain senders with configure this feature the Authorized Reception feature the Remote Change turned on Pe a Change You are pressing the wrong The default Remote Change digit pene non Remote Change digit have is 2 If pressing this digit on the pressed a keyon the opera handset keypad still does not tion panel or the machine work try changing the Remote is busy dialling Change digit to another number Do not press any key on the op eration panel before pressing the Remote Change digit If the machine is busy dialling Re mote Change is not available 49 wQ H 28 ie oH PC scanning not The PC parallel port is not Consult your PC pee onhow p 25 function properly set to ECP to set your parallel port to ECP 83 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages 1 3 The table below explains the error messages that may appear on the display and the appropriate action to take Close cover Front unit is open Close the front unit P3 If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Add paper Machine is out of paper Load paper P 11 19 If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Toner near end Machine is almost out of aoe a toner cassette for re toner placement Add Toner Toner cassette is notlo
151. e the unit Type 1 Pull the top release lever 1 and open the top unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette 2 Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner Ww co e oO i Ts 2 H Q O L v TROUBLESHOOTING Ey Pressing down on the paper release le ver blue on the right side pull out the misfed paper Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations PH Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure use the procedure on page 47 instead e Sometimes toner may get on your hands Install the toner cassette into the ma chine PH Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner e Refer to page 2 for details on how to install the toner cassette 6 Close the top unit ik Important N L J 7 Ifa paper misfeed occurs during a copy job make sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 44 TROUBLESHOOTING Type 2 Area 4 l Area 1 lT A Area 1 or 2 Pull the top release lever 1 and open the top unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette PH Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling t
152. e the unit Type 1 Pull the top release lever 1 and open the top unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette Ff Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 44 TROUBLESHOOTING Ey Pressing down on the paper release le ver blue on the right side pull out the misfed paper 4 Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations 2 Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure use the procedure on page 47 instead e Sometimes toner may get on your hands Nore 1 Ll VIN Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner Install the starter toner cassette see page 2 6 Close the top unit Note e If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part of the machine Check all areas described in this section a 9 Q k OO y o I ip O ik Important If a paper misfeed occurs during a copy job be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 45 TROUBLESHOOTING Type 2 Area 1 or 2 Pull the top release lever G1 and open the top unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette Note e Be sure to
153. e toner cassette and cleaning pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot Open the box of the new toner cassette and check to make sure it contains a toner cassette and cleaning pad Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its han dle Raise the document trap 2 Lift up the tabs located on the sides of the machine and open the front unit 94 USER MAINTENANCE 3 Hold the toner cassette by its handle and pull it out 2 Note Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 4 Remove the old cleaning pad Ka Note Be sure to grasp the green handle when re moving the cleaning pad y lt 2 cs Z V wi D N Grasp the new cleaning pad by the green handle and insert it into place 6 Press down gently but firmly on both sides of the pad to make sure that it is inserted as far as it can go Do not forget to install the cleaning pad whenever you install a new toner cassette Prepare the new toner cassette Hold ing the toner cassette by its handle gen tly shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside RA Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 7 95 USER MAINTENANCE Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side 9 Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step above on either si
154. e toner cassette inside the packaging that it comes packed in whenever itis removed from the machine Store horizontally in a cool dark place Never store a toner cassette where it will be exposed to heat Do not lay heavy objects on the toner cassette A CAUTION Keep toner cassettes out of children s reach o_o 00 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Printing the Help List Print this list to get a quick guide to frequently used fax features 1 While the machine is not performing any Prt Help List R other operation press Qnn i 5 Press OKC 2 eas Q Press Start l lt Z L O Lu H 00 Start Ey Press C to print the Help List hess Start Print on A4 Letter or Legal paper REFERENCE _ h O o_o TECHNICAL REFERENCE Customising Default Settings with the User Parameters Changing the User Parameters T he U ser Parameters allow you to customise various machine settings and features to suit your requirements T hey are four U ser Parameter Switches numbered 00 to 03 Each switch has 8 adjustable bits which can set to either 0 or 1 7654 3210 amp bit number Switch number gt 00 0000 1011 bit values For the meaning of each bit and how changing them affects the machine see page 103 Note Take care when changing the switch values Only change the bits whose mean ings are described in this manual Note Do not turn off the power while adjusting
155. eceived fax data in memory that could not be printed for some reason Substitute Reception page 46 Quick Dial keys XIV In fax operation mode press one of these keys once to recall a fax or telephone number you have stored beforehand In copy operation mode these keys have different uses Quick Dials see page 54 Press to choose whether the machine should answer all calls automatically Choosing the Reception Mode see page 46 4 Name key Press to recall a fax or telephone number stored in a Name Dial Name Dials see page 59 5 Pause Redial key Press this key in fax standby mode to recall the last number dialled While entering a fax number press this key to enter a pause shown on the display as a hyphen On Hook Dial key Press this key to establish a connection with the telephone line connected to the machine for dialing On Hook see page 52 45 Qo lt E ra ZO Help Economy Lu D Function Name DEF Mode O i o Modes m lt C Zoom gt ae OK O Redial On Hook Dial PARS WXYZ Auto Image Density Lighter Darker O SUE eae Re C Or OF lt Printing gt Second Printer key Press this key to select between printing to this machine indicator off and printing to a second printer connected to the machine indicator on XV This page is intentionally blank 1 SETTING UP Package Contents M ake s
156. ecient 98 Customising Default Settings with the User Parameters 99 Changing the User Parameters cccccccssssssssseseseesesssseeeeeeeeeeeees 99 User Parameter Switch Summary seirinin a A 100 PC GO EI S Eesen E cavencetenianroueeekceuee 103 Selecting the Language soisissa santas a Ea EA aaa 104 Economy Mod isa cts centerectdcenetidoc aaa 105 Changing the Economy Mode cccccccccssscesssssessesssessseseeeseeeeeeees 105 Mee ad S ol O71 nee ee et 106 NAEK a n E Mies 109 Part Names Operation panel e K Automatic Document ey panel for controlling the hine Feeder ADF B Holds up to 10 sheets of paper Upper paper tray for automatic feeding Place Holds up to 100 sheets of originals face down plain paper Original guide Document guides Slide the left guide to fit the size of the paper you are feeding Guides the original correctly into the machine Make sure your original fits under this g guide ay Front unit Power switch Turns the machine on and off Lower output slot Copy and printing output comes out here when the ADF is pushed down copie prints and faxes are delivered here face up Output bin When the ADF is pushed up output is delivered here face down Document output tray Scanned documents are delivered here Upper tray extension Extend to support originals Small size paper feed access panel This panel can be lowered to provide
157. econd paper source that holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or Letter size paper Important Make sure that machine power is turned off and that the power cord is unplugged from the power socket before installing the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit Part Names 1 Front guide 2 Side guide 3 Limit mark 5 a 4 Paper size indicator ze 5 Connector E 6 Corner guides 7 5 7 Metal plate N Q 1 Remove all the packing tapes from the paper feed unit and pull the paper tray out of the unit 2 After removing all tapes and cardboard from inside of the paper tray insert the tray back into the machine until it locks into place Locate the paper feed unit where you plan to use the machine Note Be sure to place the paper feed unit on a level surface GETTING ACQUAINTED The machine has handholds at the lo cations shown in the illustration Note that the illustration shows the machine as viewed from above e This illustration shows the handhold lo cation on the right side of the machine e This is the handhold location on the left side of the machine 4 Carefully lower the machine onto the paper feed unit making sure that the dowels on the paper feed unit fit into holes in the bottom of the machine properly A CAUTION When lifting the machine make sure your hands are at the locations indicated by x in the illustration This protects against pinching your fing
158. ed paper size 2 Squeezing in on both sides of the side guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size ik Important Whenever you change the paper size be sure to also specify the paper size using the operation panel To specify the paper size After you install the paper feed unit option you can select between the upper paper tray and the paper feed unit as the paper source and specify the size of paper in the paper feed unit Press the Her 1 Function Prt Help List 2 Press Zoom oL 1 Tray Pap Size gt 2 GETTING m Lu H lt oO QO lt GETTING ACQUAINTED Press OKC Ey Q Lower Tray R 2 Note The actual message that appears on the machine s display depends on the paper source you last used If Upper Tray appears press Zoom oL or lt 9 Zoom to display the Lower Tray message before proceeding with step E 4 After pressing OX Q press Zoom or Zoom until the desired size ap Letter 8 2 X 11 Db pears E When the correct size is on the display eea press KQ egistere H Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg 100 L Ol istered appears on the display To install the paper size indicator Break off the paper size indicator 1 Positioning the indicator so the side that shows the paper size you are using A4 or Letter is facing outwards insert it into the front of the paper tray To select the paper sou
159. eder ADP 0 011000110 ix Setting an Original sccsessscsssenseserseesees 35 DOOR CODY ara 29 Chek Dispi eec X Clearing a Paper Misfeed c ccsscscsseesseeseeen 43 cleaning pad ssavvecisnssavesscersosatveanduvnnsersaveninaniens 50 COMPUT PON case pcspszemesciate seerueesrnssinteee viii ix Connecting a Second Printer Adlitional Prinia F sisossissssvassenscunssesrssavssinvacoansens 15 Connecting 10 A COMPUT s sisossserrisrissiises F CONNECHOT ssssssssssssseiissserirrsseerrsssserresrserrrensnens 16 Cor MON KT xi Corner CUMS ena 16 18 Daily Maintenance c cccccssecsssessseesseessseesseessees 49 Density KEY sossccsssessvsasrsivinotetveivewaarediavvaunneneennedie Xx DIGI E E EE T xi Document guides scssessecssssesessscesessscsnesassonse ix Document ouput WAY sessista ix TSANG E E TAS 6 FCOIVOM MOE esene aE e 58 Economy Mode Clear Modes key c sseseesses xi ETD AG 0 O E EA X Enlargement sscssessessssscsssssccsscsscesssssssssansense 30 envelopes cscedecescacesvnoresmneenataoves nueniedionassedstions 14 FOU SaS aa viii ix ECAC EA eiA TE viii ix INDEX Front ouide sensisse 16 19 Front papei suppi essan 16 T a ecient 54 Help Punc OU sce xi OAS densi cissie i 34 Installing Document output Way sissu 6 Toner CASSENG rsss ma 2 pper Paper WAY senan 4 label papet ae ere pe 14 VAIS ASG e E 55 E AE EET 10 16 18 Loading Paper issssisscnsssoesoscvortoosivitvs
160. eeaes 54 OWCE OAE o EE O A 54 Stonne Quick Dials a ai 55 Editing Quick Di alS eisai scnisnvarssccesledaiseveseorecside eaaa 56 Ce ati QUICK Dialer e adobe 58 Name Dral Seena sa csune ene tetaaceecet uectoce taveceneesmescacans 59 Storno Name Dials cares poate eter N 59 Deleting Name Dials serengo eatin end ieeelaneteied 61 Dialling with Name Dials tcc ete eo isla alee 62 FRC POLS AIM AUS as lactase en ance at at aha ratchet tila atthe a 63 Prinitin He Out iial nzasa a eS 63 Printins He DALLI iesise tea a 64 Transmission Result Report ccccccccccssssscsssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeess 64 S 08 eg no 0 9 i mente Nae mrerer a ai er Moen ee rTee nro cre Tenet 65 Power Failure REPOT a vsetais ceased suee seas cde ece cto nsdaceus ten tatneaataanss 65 Unauthorized all Repor cx ctreaiee ea E 65 Advanced PCALULCS cruan onna e aA 66 Making Machine Sounds Louder or Quieter ccccceeeeeeeeees 66 Sending Faxes Over Unreliable Lines Slow 4800bps 67 JEI D a NEE EIEE ATE ANA T E AET 68 Pase Heade ousie a an ot Seddatiaseldsistnatseueecaueeanedednaes 68 Channoine OMO Settings sissu eee e aes n En Ea 68 vil 5 viii COPYING Makino t CODY serre N Da A EEEN 70 Making Multiple Copies sccicciscccsstaseeistestsnactitecsaciecndavaaetidecstticouactaaeeas 71 Makma BOOK CODY esonera pene neon reer Seer eente Seren erica arrestee 72 Reduction and nlarcemie nt esseri 73 To Sette Red uc on Pactor sseni NI
161. een FAX mode and TEL mode xt Photo Photo TEL FAX ne 2 Receiving calls in TEL Mode W hen the machine is switched to TEL mode follow these steps to answer incoming calls 1 When the machine rings remove all documents from the ADF then press On Hook i O or lift the handset and listen Ifyou hear a voice and you lifted the habdset continue the conversation as normal and replace the handset when finished Ifyou hear another fax machine make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press Fax Copy if necessary then go to step 2 Start Press then press Zoom or 2 r i Q Mode Recep Or Z Zoom until the display opposite appears L er E Press OK and replace the handset CONnMeCt BNO wes The machine will start receiving the message FAXING Screening out Unwanted Faxes with Authorized Reception T his feature lets you screen out unwanted incoming fax messages In this manual the CSI of another machine which you wish to allow to send you fax messages is referred to as a Specified Sender W hen Authorized Reception is turned on your machine will only receive fax messages from Specified Senders all other incoming messages will be rejected and not printed 2 Note Ifthe other party has not registered their CSI or clears changes it on their machine you will not be able to receive any messages from them when Authorized Reception is turned on W hen a fax message comes in the m
162. ence For safety please follow the instructions in this manual Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in C Declaration of Conformity this manual Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine Please read the safety information on pages i iii of this manual It contains Important Information related The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage to user safety and preventing equipment problems Directive 73 23 EEC Operator Safety In accordance IEC 60417 this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch This machine is considered a class 1 laser device safe for office EDP use The machine contains a 5 means POWER ON milliwat 765 805 nanometer wavelength GaAlAs laser diodes Direct or indirect reflected eye contact O means POWER OFF with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator The following label is attached on the machine This label can be found when opening the bypass tray Z CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH IEC 825 LASER KLASSE 1 nach IEC 825 Laser Safety The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory o
163. end of your telephone call T his is useful when e The other party shares their line with a similar fax machine and you wish to send or receive a mes sage after your conversation e You wish to check that the number is indeed a fax number before attempting to send your message Note The other party s machine must support this feature Oo Z a LL 1 Do one of the following Pick up the telephone handset and dial with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode pick up the telephone handset and dial using the operation panel numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press the On Hook key and dial using a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key When the other party answers pick up the telephone handset H Note In some locales On Hook dialling is not available and or you cannot dial using a Quick Dial Name Dial the number keys or Redial key when the handset is lifted 49 FAXING Listen to the line Ifa voice answers continue your conversation as normal When you wish to send a fax listen for the fax tone of the other party then continue from step Ey below When you wish to receive a fax listen for the fax tone of the other party then continue from step g below Sending a Fax during a Telephone Call EI Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode set your document and ad jus
164. ent output tray ose tl ve crrcnermmeat i tececsee cass ix HATS AO as ote tose teats ees 6 Economy Mode cnc ectsttedaretarsscastttenredatds 60 Economy Mode Clear Modes key csecsceeses xi FIN AT SC aiee A X Enlarcemen kocone ee 30 Eelis a Gon sss sense ioe ce taste et 14 Exposure CASS jase tes ahoereennssoicenens viii ix EXIGnG lay manene viii ix INDEX PROM oade sasaa ieee Rene oes cess 16 19 FONE paper SUPPOL tenons manana 16 Help listenn en arerceasienuieiitail ites 56 Help runci eorr xi age densi aeea 34 Installing DOGUINEHE output AY erresen n 6 TONET CASSEE ninae 2 Upper Paper AY i erie 4 label paper sururidan tolite 14 NNN A E eacassenncceettetemmnnane 5 Limit matk o 10 16 18 Loading Papet grist csrisstcomnmebsanGiiallecatsconies 10 Loading PAADID sarira 10 E a E EES 12 Oer MEd esa atcha ste tates cassie 14 6 67 NG eae l M Memory Copy Type 1 only sss xi 28 Metal p e ieee coco Paasssvcsesssteaen 10 16 18 Multiple Copies i ieoosrsaccestenraonoarosansprettnrcennds 28 OR a EE TTT xi Operation Panel c ccccsssesssessesssseneense viii ix x Original Setting Exposure glass oo 27 SCHUM OADE r 35 Requirements ADE sssi 36 Oni CIA GUIUE osseous ix OUUU e ARES A viii iX 65 INDEX Paper and Other Media c sssscssssssssscsssssesseen 9 Paper Sc leC im onan a X paper size CHI AM OH IN ccscteestcuerccegaacaten runes ale 19 Specifying upper ssa
165. er Replace the toner cassette p 97 printout cassette caused by turning off the machine too soon after copying a large number of pages Dark areas along the Turning off the machine too Replace the toner cassette sides of the printout soon after printing or copy ing a large number of pages Printing O sms cae Romey Abnormal or unex Use of wrong cable Use the cable that comes with pected printing results this machine Wrong printer driver set Change to the correct printer p 25 tings driver settings Attempting to print from a Change to 300 dpi p 105 DOS application at 600 dpi Parts of the image are The correct paper size is Specify the paper size using the p 20 not printed out not specified operation panel Cannot print from a Second printer is not con Check connections and make p 16 second printer nected correctly corrections if necessary l Second Printer ae Second printer is not se Press Q so the indi p 28 lected cator above itis lit Incorrect settings of the Use the printer driver ofthe sec second printer driver ond printer to turn off bi direc tional printing 83 TROUBLESHOOTING Copying and Faxing 1 2 sus cause Romey Pago p 3 Error 90 appears on Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock turn the display and the copy the machine off and then back operation is aborted on when copying from the exposure glass Frequent original mis
166. er Toner Cassette Pull the top release lever G1 and open the top unit 2 Hold the starter toner cassette by its handle and remove it from its vinyl bag A CAUTION Keep all plastic bags out of the reach of chil dren ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle F Note Keep the vinyl bag for later repackaging when necessary Ey Holding the starter toner cassette by its handle gently shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step Ej on either side of the starter toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine H Note Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle 6 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into place Ff Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette SETTING UP A _ O Z H _ Lu p i SETTING UP Installing Other Hardware Unlocking the Scanner ik Important Be sure to unlock the scanner before using the machine The machine will not operate correctly if the scanner
167. er copying finishes press Q to clear any settings 72 COPYING Reduction and Enlargement Reduce a Enlarge Press Oro to select preset reduction or enlargement factors for the copy operation To Set the Reduction Factor 1 Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE Reduce Press until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order g Ratio 100 93 87 82 50 lt 71 A4 gt A5 Start Press C to perform the copy opera A tion Start P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Z gt Oo e O Ts COPYING To Set the Enlargement Factor 1 Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE Enlarge Press until the desired size ratio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 115 122 E saai lt 141 AS gt ee Start EN Press C to perform the copy opera tion fi Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings 74 Ratio Original Paper size _ p Start COPYING Zoom in 1 Increments Zoom allows you to tune the preset reduction and enlargement factors to ex actly the value you want You can change the zoom factor in increments of 1 Setting Range Help Help Function Function Zoom gt Zoom oL OK Q 200 to 50 50 to 200 1 Carefully insert the docume
168. er to page 78 for how to set originals Sorting is activated when the Y pointer Receive File 2 is visible on the display above Sort PCiterace or o e e So rt Second Printer Hass Fine emory CO Memory Copy Press KOPY to turn sorting on ERR ue Enlarge Papers 80 Start When you press Q to start the copy operation all of the originals on the ADF are scanned into memory before they are printed la Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Start COPYING 81 2 Z gt A O O Te 6 TROUBLESHOOTING General Nothing happens Power cord is not con Correctly connect the power when the machine is nected cord to the machine and plug it turned on into a outlet SIMM is not installed correctly Install the SIMM correctly SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required p 23 required specifications specifications Paper misfeeds when Paper was loaded in the Remove the paper turn the ma the machine is turned machine before the ma chine off and then back on Af on for the first time chine was turned on ter machine initialization is after the installation complete load the paper back into the machine After installing a SIMM SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required board the memory required specifications specifications value that appears on the machine s display does not match the amount
169. erations while Reg istered appears on the display Do one of the following O D eo 9 N Enter another function number Press Oron to return to standby mode Oo lt a LL a Cancelling Reception of a Fax If for some reason you want to cancel reception of fax while it is being received do the following Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode Recep canceled Stop 2 Press QO H Note A portion of the fax message may still be printed gt i FAXING Making Telephone Calls If you connect an optional telephone handset you can use the same line for both telephone calls and fax messages 2 Note If you wish to be able to receive telephone calls be sure to select TEL mode Choosing a Reception Mode see page 46 Do one of the following 1 Pick up the telephone handset and dial with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode pick up the telephone handset and dial using the operation panel numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press the On Hook key and dial using a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key When the other party answers pick up the telephone handset 2 Note In some locales On Hook dialling is not available and or you cannot dial using a Quick Dial Name Dial the number keys or Redial key when the handset is lifted 2 Continue y
170. ers see page 42 Help 1 Press Function t Prt Help List P 2 Press Zoom Gr Function no 3 Press L 14 Name Dial Ok Press OK 4 Q Register OK 5 Press OK Q 58 i FAXING 6 Enter the fax number you wish to store with the numeric keypad 1234567898 Eg press h 2s 3s 45 5565 EE Press OKC Q Name E Enter or edit the name for this Name Dial E g press 05 05 Spm O gt Qo Qo g5 Name XYZ COn B Zoom OL 05 05 05 05 Zoom OL P Zoom 4 gt 25 25 25 Zoom gt 65 65 bs Zoom 4 gt P P Zoom 4 gt 9 Press OKC Registered FH Note Register OK Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display e Ifa Name Dial with the same name is al ready stored Name exists will flash on the display Enter a different name Oo lt a LL 10 Do one of the following To store another Name Dial go back to step gy To return to standby mode press Oprincton twice To access another function press Oprincton once and enter another function number 5 FAXING Deleting Name Dials Help 1 Press Orunction 2 Press Zoom Gr 3 Press L 45 4 Press OK Q Zoom r 5 Press OK Q Enter the first letter of the Name Dial label E g press 6 If Name Dial you are looking for does not ap pear keep pressing the key until it does E g press 6 again PF Note You can also
171. ers between the machine and paper feed unit Note After the above installation attach the power cord to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet Refer to page amp for details 18 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper into the Paper Feed Unit You can load either A4 or Letter size paper into the paper feed unit Refer to page 20 for details on how to change the positions of the paper guides inside of the tray to match the type of paper you are using 1 Pull out the paper tray and remove it from the paper feed unit Press down on the metal plate in the bottom of the paper tray until the plate locks into place with a click 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Ey Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb can be inserted into the pa per tray as shown in the illustration Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the side fence H Note Make sure the leading corners of the paper fit under the corner guides 4 Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place GETTING ACQUAINTED Changing the Paper Size U se the following procedure to set the positions of the paper guides inside the paper tray for either A4 or Letter paper 1 Squeezing in on both sides of the front guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size 2 Squeezing in on both sides of the side guide slide it to the correct position for the
172. esadinvenssseevivn 10 Loading PIAA U E E A 10 SIAL SIZE papei sousni 12 AID 101 aan ee AE O 14 HOG AON eni es ea ene eriaeecenasiss l M Memory Copy Type 1 only sss xi 28 NAN VANE cessan 10 16 18 IAI Gi OD Co E EE 28 OI E acts heey xi Operation Panel esos viii ix x Original Setting Exposure glass ccscesseecseesesssee 27 Setting ADF secossa id 35 Requirements ADF s s 36 CPCI AI GWG a ix OUI AD oeer aunty nase viii ix 63 INDEX Paper and Other Media c ccccsssccseseeseeeseeseeen 9 a E TEE E x paper size CHAM CI a E 19 Specifying upper oes 11 13 SPECHVING TOWER a iwacssivsewsnrwauisvnininrans 19 Paper Sie UN CICALOR onasini 16 19 Paper Feed Unii sennen 16 PC Interf aCe steeryesis aheaciposesion enedsastseonsatnantoyaen X Jie I EE EE EE 33 Photo veceeccecccesceescescssesscsessssessesssssssessesssseesessen 33 Platen COVED enoni viii ix Power socket o u viii ix Power switch ooo ceceseseesesesssesesscssseceesveneees viii ix printer driver EUN r S 23 E e A E TEN 24 Quanh KOS sesno X TREC E EE X RECUO ecne 30 Replacing Toner CASSCUE nenun 50 cleaning palon 50 resolution photo setting 11s seee 33 SALLY MOTEL ALON rna i Scanner lock cect is2 053 ics srosseusndecyessanndeesasesss viii ix Calock iT enaici 3 Second Printer Additional Printer port viii ix EE AE G026 64 Second Printer Additional Printer 0 c cce X 5 0015
173. et tings are cleared Changing the Economy Mode Hold down the Clear modes key for approximately 1 second until the Economy mode indicator lights or goes out as required Economy Mode ON Economy Mode OFF Economy Mode lear Modes Clear Modes Osiop Osiop 60 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Selecting Toner Saving Mode T he toner saving mode status has two settings Help tt O gd 2 Press Zoom OL or Zoom until 3 User Param appears The messages Yser param gt change in the following order OK 7 3 Press XC and press Zoom m to f 3 0010 hase a move the flashing block cursor until it appears in one of the positions shown in the illustration to the right H Note The bits other than the one highlighted in the illustration are unrelated to this setting Up Press Jf to change the bit setting to 1 or 0 as desired Display 02 0010 0000 OF Default l lt L Z T O Lu H N REFERENCE 02 0010 0100 On Density will be lighter Press OKC 5 O Please wait 2 Note Stop e To cancel this change press Q or Hel QOhinchon instead of OK Q Please wait and Not Registered appear on the display 100 01 Registered e Do not carry out any operations while Registered appears on the display 6 oh 8 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Paper Capacity Upper tray plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 100 sheets Option paper unit plain pape
174. et up the machine you need to load paper then specify the paper size using the procedure below ik Important When loading paper into the upper paper tray do not load more than 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb Overloading the upper paper tray can cause misfeeds Loading Plain Paper into the Upper Paper Tray Fan the stack of paper to make sure that all pages are free and are not sticking together The upper paper tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 b 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or tabletop EJ Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide p t ff A V a C BZ A 4 Squeeze the tray guide and slide it against the edge of the stack B A 11 GETTING ACQUAINTED Press QEP 5 Ohuncton Prt Help List 6 Press Zoom Function no Press s b Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size Press OK 8 Q Tray guide OK OK 9 Press OKC Then press Zoom or lt 9 Zoom until the correct paper size appears 61 Tray Pap Size v When the correct paper size is on the dis play press OK Q If the paper feed unit option page 17 is installed you can also select its paper size at this time
175. etting press to clear it then enter the new number Clear 10 Press OK Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to se lect the PSTN access method Three methods are available lt number gt Access the outside line by dialling the number you entered in step EJ Ground Ground Start Flash Flash Start FAXING Mode PABX No gt Mode PABX Yes 1 Set up oe Postline by _ Post line Dyz U s Method 0 Vee Method Flash io O1 Oo Z Le FAXING Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear 2 Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 13 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Help Function to return to standby mode Registered 1 Set up K Storing your Own Fax Number Store the telephone number of the line your machine is connected to T his will appear on the other party s display during communication and be printed on their and your own reports RA Note In some locales you cannot store your own fax number If the other party is using Authorized Reception or a similar feature to han dle messages from certain senders differently they should specify this infor mation when registering Specified Senders on their machine To increase the legibility of your number you can insert a character and spaces To enter a press
176. f an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flowerpots glasses on the machine If the contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur 1 SETTING UP Z CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface Ifit topples over it could cause injury o If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Location Environment O f o e 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F Humidity 15 to 80 30 to 70 e The machine must be level within 3mm 0 11 both front to rear and left to right Locations to Avoid e Avoid exposed to direct sunlight or strong light more than 2 000 lux e Avoid directly exposed to cool air from air conditioner s or heated air from heater s Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine e Avoid where the machine mi ght be subjected to frequent strong vibration e Places higher than 2 500m 8 221ft above sea level Machine Clearance Place the machine near the wall outlet providing minimum clearance as shown Min 180mm 7 09 SETTING UP Installing the Starter Toner Cassette Pull the top release lever G1 and open the top unit 2 Hold the starter toner cassette by its handle and remove it from
177. f the machine Check all areas described in this section ik Important TROUBLESHOOTING If a paper misfeed occurs during a copy job be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 89 19 Q H OO y o EL oH TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Misfeed in the ADF 1 Open the ADF cover FH Note Be sure to open the ADF cover before pulling out the misfed original Failure to do so can result in damage to the original 2 Pull out the misfed original Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place ik Important If copying was in progress be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Pull out the misfed paper 90 TROUBLESHOOTING Ey Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place Note For how to set paper in the optional paper feed unit see page 19 19 Q H OO y o I Go T Tip If you cannot find a remedy for unexpected printout results here check the printer driver s online help for other useful information When Paper Will Not Feed If paper has completely stopped feeding check using the following proce dure 1 Remove all paper C Raise the document trap 2 Lift up the tabs located on the sides of the machine and open the front unit Ey Pull out the toner cassette TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Pull the blue key shaped pawl located deep inside on the right where
178. features and functions 2 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Using the Second Printer Additional Printer Use the following procedure to switch between this machine and a second printer when a second printer is connected ik Important If the second printer has a bi directional mode make sure you turn it off Refer to page 15 for details on connecting a second printer Printing to the Second Printer Second Printer Press O The Second Printer indicator lights PC Interface ik Important T second Printer Whenever you change printers be sure to also change to the appropriate printer driver on your computer FH Note While the Second Printer Indicator is lit print data from your computer passes through the machine to the second printer Perform the required print operation with the application you are using 28 4 FAXING Your machineis furnished with superior faxing capabilities and wide a range of powerful fax features H ere are some of the things you can do e Send and receive fax messages e Store fax numbers you often use and recall them with a single key press e Redial the previous fax number e Share your fax line with a telephone e Keep track of machine usage through printed reports e Customise default settings to suit your requirements H Note Please read the Setup section before you start It explains how to set up the fax feature to suit your needs Switching between Fax Operation and C
179. fthe machine too Replace the toner cassette sides of the printout soon after printing or copy ing a large number of pages Printing satus J caus O O emey Abnormal or unex Use of wrong cable Use the cable that comes with pected printing results this machine Wrong printer driver set Change to the correct printer p 23 tings driver settings Attempting to print from a Change to 300 dpi p 58 DOS application at 600 dpi Parts of the image are The correct paper size is Specify the paper size using the p 19 not printed out not specified operation panel Sent Cannot print from a Second printer is not con Check connections and make second printer nected correctly corrections if necessary Second Printer Second printer is not se Press Q so the indi p 26 lected cator above itis lit Incorrect settings of the Use the printer driver ofthe sec second printer driver ond printer to turn off bi direc tional printing 40 TROUBLESHOOTING Copying Error 90 appears on Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock turn the display and the copy the machine off and then back operation is aborted on when copying from the exposure glass Frequent original mis Original is not set correctly Set the original correctly feeds with ADE Curled original s Straighten out the original s Insert the original s from the least curled side Incorrect original specifi Use ori
180. fy the Copy Mode A pointer W appears on the display to indicate the current Text Fine Photol Photo2 setting Display Displays messages and prompts during operation M Memory Copy Type 1 only Press this key to select Memory Copy Your original will be scanned only once when making multiple copies Sort Memory Copy Type 2 only Press this key to turn Sorting and Memory Copy on and off Sorting is activated when the pointer is visible on the display above Sort Memory Copy xi 1 SETTING UP Package Contents M ake sure that all of the items shown in the Package C ontents sheet that comes with the machine are included A WARNING Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flowerpots glasses on the machine If the contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur 1 SETTING UP A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface Ifit topples over it could cause injury o If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Location Conditions O J om o 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F 15 to 80 30 to 70 e The machine must be level within 3mm 0 11 bot
181. g carbon carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or other very thin paper CAUTION Envelopes A S Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper After you have set up the machine you nee to load paper then specify the paper size using the procedure below ik Important When loading paper into the upper paper tray do not load more than 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb Overloading the upper paper tray can cause misfeeds To load plain paper into the upper paper tray Fan the stack of paper to make sure that all pages are free and are not sticking together The upper paper tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 b 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by tapping them on a desk or table top 3 Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide 4 Squeeze the tray guide and slide it against the edge of the stack LA GETTING ACQUAINTED Press N 0E 5 Q Function Prt Help List 6 Press Zoom 2 Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size Press OK O Tray guide OK Ok After pressing OK press zoom or lt Q Zoom until the desired size ap
182. g to the setting the heater turns off T he economy mode is on as the default setting panei off ON default setting 15 minutes including time when operation panel is off 240 minutes including time when operation panel is off P Note e During the Economy Mode the heater turns back on in the following cases when any key on the operation panel is pressed when the platen cover is opened when paper is set in or removed from the upper paper tray Type 2 when the tray of the paper feed unit option is pulled out or pushed back into the machine e When a key on the operation panel is pressed to turn the heater on the key does not perform its normal function After the heater is turned back on the previous quantity and Sort On set tings are cleared Changing the Economy Mode Hold down the Clear modes key for approximately 1 second until the Economy mode indicator lights or goes out as required Economy Mode ON Economy Mode OFF lt I7 onomy Node Clear Modes Economy Mode Clear Modes OSiop Osiop 58 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Selecting Toner Saving Mode T he toner saving mode status has two settings 2 Press Zoom OL or lt 9 Zoom until 3 User Param appears The messages Yser Param change in the following order C 1 Tray Pap Size J 3 User Param 2 Language OK 3 Press OKC and press Zoom O to o2 0000 omoc move the flashing block cursor until i
183. g when you turn this feature on with the following procedure Oo Z a LL 51 FAXING Help 1 Press Function j 2 Press Zoom Gr Press 3 25 Press OK Q Press a Zoom or Zoom to turn Remote Change on or off Press OK Q and do one of the follow ing Ifyou turned Remote Change on go to step gg Ifyou turned Remote Change off go to step E Press a digit on the numeric keypad to select the Remote Change digit E g press 2 8 Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear GH Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display 9 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Oro to return to standby mode 52 Prt Help List P Function no 32 Remote Change Mode Off xK Mode On xK Change with 2 x Change with T Ox Registered 3 Fax Switch Ok FAXING Storing Fax and Telephone Numbers T his machine provides two useful methods for storing fax and tdephone numbers e Quick Dials e Name Dials FH Note The maximum length of a fax number you can dial or store in Quick Dials Name Dials is 40 digits Quick Dials If you often dial certain numbers you can save time and effort by storing them in Quick Dial keys Once stored instead of entering a fax number directly on the numeric keypad just pres
184. gazine or any other original that cannot be fed using the ADF Output tray Document output tray Originals that pass through the machine s scanner mechanism during copying operations Scanner lock are automatically stacked on this tray Extend to suppor S originals Extend tray N t X Small size paper feed access panel SX A ANNS ESSN Y N NN D ANN N ANNY S NN SBN 7 Power socket rd Second Printer Additional Printer port Computer port GENERAL Z O _ oc Q Y Lu OQ Operation Panel Check Display lt 4 2 amp PC interface Memory CopyTextFine Photol Ahoto2 Second Printer E 3 O Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge Paper Select u Lighter bf ina C Check Display 5 Enlarge This indicator lights up to alert you to read the message on the display 2 PC Interface This indicator lights while the machine is receiving data from a connected computer 3 Second Printer Pressing this key switches between printing on the machine Second Printer indicator off and printing on a second printer connected to the machine Second Printer indicator on 4 Reduce Press this key to reduce an image during copying Available reduction ratios are 50 71 82 87 and 93 Press this key to enlarge an image during copying Available enlargement ratios are 115 122 141 and 200 6 Paper Select Press this key to specify the paper size When th
185. ghterO Darker Q Select Darker to make the image darker Auto Image Density Lighter O Darker Start Press C to perform the copy opera NWA ave Start iy Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Z gt Oo O O Ts COPYING sorting Output T he following example shows how output is affected by turning sorting on and off Sort On 5 7 iais Important The sort operation requires scanning of all your originals into memory before starting the copy operation The number of originals that can be scanned at one time depends on how much memory you have installed Refer to page 23 for de tails on increasing memory capacity Sort Copying Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE How to set originals see page 69 2 Sorting is activated when the Y pointer receive file is visible on the display above Sort erece ronan Second Printer Sort Memory Copy Memory Copy Press to turn sorting on eer Reduce Enlarge Paper sg 78 Start When you press Q to start the copy operation all of the originals on the ADF are scanned into memory before they are printed P Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press Q to clear any settings Start COPYING 79 2 Z gt A O O Ts 6 TROUBLESHOOTING General sms cause nomeay Pao Nothing happens Power cord is
186. ginals of the correct size cations thickness and quantity Original is not fed ADF cover is open Close the ADF cover from the ADE Original is not fed out The document output tray Set the document output tray properly is not set correctly and the small pieces of plastic film correctly Periodic black marks Cleaning pad is not in Correctly install the cleaning p 51 on printed output Stalled pad Black lines and marks Copying to small size paper Place a sheet of the same sizeas p 27 on printed output with the Type 2 machine the paper you are printing onto when copying from the Different size original and behind the original exposure glass copy paper Non white original back ground Dirty platen cover or expo Clean the platen cover and ex p 51 sure glass posure glass Black and white lines Dirty ADF transport path Clean the ADF transport path on printed output when using the ADF Output too light Low contrast original Adjust the print density Unclear photographic Copying in Text Fine Mode Use the Copy Mode key to select images the Photo1 or Photo2 Mode Parts of the original The correct paper size is Specify the paper size using the image are not copied not specified operation panel Scanning 19 Q OO y o EL ip PC scanning does not The PC parallel portis not Consult your PC manual on how p 23 function properly set to ECP to set your parallel
187. gt key to move the cursor forward a ee E er Ss eee oeo p o e i Space 0 61 s ja o 6 30 FAXING Note Some special characters in lower case appear identical in upper case on the display due to space limitations These characters are printed correctly on lists and reports Deleting Characters and Moving the Cursor W hen entering names and storing numbers Clear e To delete the character to the left of the cursor press Q P Note Clear If the cursor is at the far left of the display pressing Q deletes the whole name and number e To move the cursor left press the lt 9 Zoom key e To move the cursor right press the Zoom OL key Oo Z Le a 31 FAXING Setting up Please Read This First Before you can send or receive faxes you must connect the machine to a telephone line and store the following settings Own Name ITI see page 33 Dial Mode see page 34 Own Fax Number see page 36 Date and Time see page 38 In addition you may wish to adjust the following Selecting the Language see page 104 Summer Time Daylight Saving Time see page 39 The volume of sounds the machine makes see page 65 If you wish to share the line with a telephone handset you may need to change the reception mode Choosing a Reception Mode see page 45 Connecting to the Telephone Line T here are two similar sockets located at the rear of the machine
188. h front to rear and left to right Locations to Avoid e Avoid exposed to direct sunlight or strong light more than 2 000 lux e Avoid directly exposed to cool air from air conditioner s or heated air from heater s Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine e Avoid where the machine mi ght be subjected to frequent strong vibration e Places higher than 2 500m 8 221ft above sea level Machine Location Place the machine near the wall outlet providing minimum clearance as shown Min 180mm 7 09 SETTING UP Installing the Starter Toner Cassette Pull the top release lever 1 and open the top unit 2 Hold the starter toner cassette by its handle and remove it from its vinyl bag A CAUTION Keep all plastic bags out of the reach of chil dren ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Note Keep the vinyl bag for later repackaging when necessary Ey Holding the starter toner cassette by its handle gently shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side SETTING UP Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step Ej on either side of the starter toner cas
189. h the type of paper you are using 1 Pull out the paper tray and remove it from the paper feed unit Press down on the metal plate in the bottom of the paper tray until the plate locks into place with a click Ey Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb can be inserted into the pa per tray as shown in the illustration Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the side fence Note Make sure the leading corners of the paper fit under the corner guides 4 Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place GETTING ACQUAINTED To change the paper size U se the following procedure to set the positions of the paper guides inside the paper tray for either A4 or Letter paper 1 Squeezing in on both sides of the front guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size 2 Squeezing in on both sides of the side guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size ik Important Whenever you change the paper size be sure to also specify the paper size using the operation panel To specify the paper size After you install the paper feed unit option you can select between the upper paper tray and the paper feed unit as the paper source and specify the size of paper in the paper feed unit Help a ist ap BE es se as pears 2 Press zoom G or aC 200m until 1 a F Tray Pap Siz
190. he copy quantity again Remove original An original is under the Remove the original If there is and from glass platen cover no original open the platen cover and close it again Sto Memory full and Too much sort copy data Press O to cancel sort copy Press Stop and perform the copy operation without sorting If you need to printbig sortcopyjobs increase memory capacity oO BO No OI oO No ioe N Start Memory full and Too many sort copy pages Press to print pages already p 21 37 Press Start stored in memory If you need to print big sort copy jobs in crease memory capacity Error 90 Locked scanner Unlock the scanner lock tumthe p 3 machine off and then back on Error XX Possible machine defect Turn power off and then back p 8 on again If you have a problem with the machine and you can not resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter contact your service representative In case of Error XX messages be sure to turn off the machine before calling 42 TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Paper Misfeed T his section describes how to clear a paper misfeed when one occurs CAUTION When removing misfed paper do not touch the fusing section because it could be very not ik Important Hold a misfed sheet with both hands and slowly pull it out Do not use a tool such as a screwdriver or tweezers as this may damag
191. he machine uo a tl ee EAA 7 Selecting the Language see page 104 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Important The default display language is English For how to change to your preferred language see page 104 Paper and Other Media T he machine supports printing on the following types of paper media from the upper paper tray Refer to the following pages for details Paper Media type Paper size Display FH Note Do not attempt to use the following types of paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper paper containing carbon carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or other very thin paper A CAUTION Plain paper Envelopes Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper After you have set up the machine you need to load paper then specify the paper size using the procedure below ik Important When loading paper into the upper paper tray do not load more than 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb Overloading the upper paper tray can cause misfeeds Loading Plain Paper into the Upper Paper Tray Fan the stack of paper to make sure that all pages are free and are not sticking together The upper paper tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 b 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED 2 Straighten up all four sides of the stack by t
192. he operator The following label is attached on the machine This label can be found when opening the bypass tray CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH IEC 825 LASER KLASSE 1 nach IEC 825 Laser Safety The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsys tems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Notes e Model names for the machines do not appear in the following pages Check the type of your ma chine before reading this manual Bizworks 706 e Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine e Certain types may not be available in some countries For details contact your local dealer Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual With this machine refer to the metric version For good print quality Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product Power Source 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 2 2 A Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above For details about power con nection refer to page 8 Trademarks Micro
193. he paper and realign it p 11 19 if necessary Insert paper into the upper paper tray from the least curled side 80 TROUBLESHOOTING Printing and Copying 2 2 sus cause hemeay Page Frequent paper mis Attemptingto printon both Printon onlyone side Two side p 11 19 feeds sides of the paper printing is not supported by this machine Printing onto loosely Flatten the envelopes to expelall p 15 stacked envelopes air ofthe envelope Make sure that envelope flaps p 15 are closed folded down Part of the image is oa is distributed un Remove the toner cassette gen unclear evenly in the toner cassette tly rock it left and right a few 1 9 Q s5 a OO o n oH times and replace it into the machine Black lines on the Heat damage to the toner Replace the toner cassette printout cassette caused by turning off the machine too soon after copying a large number of pages Dark areas along the Turningoffthe machine too Replace the toner cassette sides of the printout soon after printing or copy ing a large number of pages Printing Abnormal or unex Use a wrong cable Use a i cable that comes with pected printing results this machine Wrong printer driver set Change to the correct printer p 25 tings driver settings Attempting to print from a Change to 300 dpi p 102 DOS application at 600 dpi Parts of the image are The correct paper size is
194. he platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Reduce Press Q until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 93 gt 77 65 L LGL gt ITR lt aa Start EJ Press C to perform the copy op eration P Note Clear Modes Press to clear the setting after copying 30 o set the enlargement factor Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Enlarge i Press until the desired size ra tio appears The sizes change in the fol lowing order 100 121 129 gt 155 LITR gt LGE lt 200 Start Press to perform the copy op eration PD Note Clear Modes Press to clear the setting after copying SETAE ERARAS rane BENS COPYING 01 31 O Z gt A O Q f COPYING Zoom In 1 Increments Zoom allows you to tune the preset reduction and enlargement factors to ex actly the value you want You can change the zoom factor in increments of 1 To use zoom Setting Range Help Help Function Function lt 2 Zoom gt Zoom oL OK Q 200 to 50 50 to 200 Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Press lt Zo
195. he toner e m OO oc O eL PEL 45 TROUBLESHOOTING Ey Pressing down on the paper release le ver blue on the right side pull out the misfed paper Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations P Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure use the procedure on page 47 instead e Sometimes toner may get on your hands Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner e Refer to page 2 for details on how to install the toner cassette 6 Close the top unit ik Important AW Dineen i gt yaa sY Ifa paper misfeed occurs during a copy job make sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 46 TROUBLESHOOTING Area 3 or 4 1 Open the ADF cover Note Be sure to open the ADF cover before pulling out the misfed original Failure to do so can result in damage to the original 2 Pull out the misfed original Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place ik Important Make sure to specify the desired copy quantity again Paper feed unit Use the following procedure when the misfed paper cannot be removed using the procedure on page 43 for Type 1 or page 45 for Type 2 1 Pull out the paper t
196. hen printing using a D O S application compatible with the 300 dpi PCL printer 1 Press Oa Prt Help List ap pears Press Zoom OL or 4G Zoom until 3 User Param appears The messages VUS param gt change in the following order 1 Tray Pap Size T 3 User Param 2 Language Prt Help List OK EX Press OK and press Zoom to move the flashing block cursor until it 04 0010 000 gt appears in the position shown in the illustration to the right PH Note The bits other than the one highlighted in the illustration are unrelated to this setting U Press 0 as desired Display 02 0010 0000 600 dpi default setting to change the setting to 1 or 02 0010 1000 300 dpi 56 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 5 Press OKC Please wait then Reg istered appears oh Please wait Stop e To cancel this change press OC or Registered Helo Qhinction instead of OK Q Please wait and Not Registered appear on the display Do not turn off the machine while Please wait Registered or Not Registered is displayed l lt O Os 2 Wl m i a a O U Lu LL me Ww na 57 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Economy Mode T he Economy mode can be selected to save power If no operation is per formed for 5 minutes the display becomes blank and all the indicators go out If no operation is performed in the next 10 minutes or 235 minutes accordin
197. hese settings PCL Resolution 0 600dpi 600dpi Set the printer to 300 dpi 1 300dpi if the designated output is not obtained when printing using a DOS application compatible with the 300 dpi PCL printer 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Toner Saving mode 0 Off Off When Toner Saving is 1 On turned on the machine prints using less toner Use this mode if you wish to save on toner and do not mind lighter prints Do not change these settings SWITCH 03 Exol ti Available mpianeten Settings 7 Do not change these settings 105 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Function List p16 Ommam B pT ome o S B 21 Authorized Reception B o E AdjustVolume 6 Page Header Summer Time RDS Mode 52 User Parameters Tray Paper Size 106 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Selecting the Language al gotb Press OKC and press Zoom or zom until the desired language appears Press OKC 4 i Note e Do not carry out any operations while Registered appears on the display e If you do not press OK Q the setting is not changed 1 Set up K REFERENCE l lt L Z L O Lu H 00 5 Press Ora to return to the standby display 107 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Economy Mode Economy mode is a power saving feature and is turned on by default If no operation is performed for 5 minutes the display becomes blank and all the indicators go out If no operation is performed in the next 1
198. hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 46 TROUBLESHOOTING Push back the blue paper release lever located on the right PF Note The lever releases pressure on the paper If you do not push it back you could damage the machine when removing paper Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure use the procedure on page 47 instead e Sometimes toner may get on your hands Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Efe S 5 Note ES T Ff Sm Nee e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner Install the starter toner cassette see page 2 6 Close the top unit Ff Note e If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part of the machine Check all areas described in this section a 9 Q k OO y o ia a ip O ik Important If a paper misfeed occurs during a copy job make sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 47 TROUBLESHOOTING Area 3 or 4 1 Open the ADF cover Note Be sure to open the ADF cover before pulling out the misfed original Failure to do so can result in damage to the original 2 Pull out the
199. i a e X Original type select key ccccsscessesesssssenen xiii QUID TRAY EE E eeu acme X Output tray extension sssi x 6 Q Pate hedder aai ANE 67 Paper and other media c cccsccssecssesseeseesesses 10 Paper select key serestsssssanescactstreasaeraenveeco xiii paper size CITATION N 20 Specifying upper susxaescseonimatns 13 15 Specifying lower iscsssecssiusuetasimasenmineevers 19 110 Paper size MdiCAtOt snappen 17 19 Paper feod UN orn 17 Pause Redial key ss csstbccstyorbanustowrngessi ares xiv PC Interface indicator sakes ests istssse kta xiii PUNO UCN gears fis td E crete ee acce eats 76 PHOS sea 76 PTEI CO as X PONSO O an a a X POWER SWIC e lobed ediescnis dn X Printer driver Windows 95 98 nenn 25 MOS e ANR 25 Printer driver contents u 26 Printing the dial list css cosserirertesosiisaonessventeays 63 Printing the journal ccccccscseesssseessseeen 62 Power failure report ss 64 Quick Dials Clearing Quick Dial sssssssoorrrtereesssssssss 57 Eding OUICk Diales 55 Storing Quick Dial s s 54 OUTEK DAK ra T xiv Receive file indicator derecesi xiv RECEIVE AN CS oe sii icici woe aan cones 45 Reception mode key c ccccssecsessssscsssescessesseen xiv Redialling a number sss 43 Reduce k6 y seccceussasseetsttiets avin ltulenctiaiennsssstudcedes xiii PREGUC HOI serene ctor tse drt tact Gti R 73 Remote chante secs ssrusaia sos a 51 Replacing TLOREIEC ASS EUG encin
200. ick Dial press a Quick Dial key Sort Memory Copy E g press Note To print a list of currently stored Quick Dials press Zoom r to select Quick dial 8 Start Then press C 6 Enter or edit the fax number you wish to store with the numeric keypad sores 23556565 OP Prt Help List P Function no T3 Quick Dial y Press Quick or vine Print List P Dial Last vine Press Start PPLINC II erg 12345678 98 O1 Oo lt a LL FAXING Press OK Q Enter or edit the name for this Quick Dial E g press JS OS zone 05 YS 95 mO PP PP O P Zoom 4 gt 25 25 25 Zoom gt 65 65 65 Zoom 4 gt P P Zoom 4 gt 9 Press OK Q 2 Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display Do one of the following To store another Quick Dial go back to step To return to standby mode press Q rinchon twice To access another function press C rinshon then enter a function number Editing Quick Dials T Press Oe 2 Press Zoom r 3 Press E 3 56 Be XYZ COSB Registered Print List Press Quick or Prt Help List DP Function no 1S O iok Dial 3 FAXING Press OK y 4 O Print List P vin Press Quick or 5 Press the Quick Dial key you wish to Clear Then press Q edit 234567989 Press Zoom CF twice then press P 1268456789 1208456789
201. ile reception is in process The line will be disconnected immediately and following pages of the same message will not be received 90 TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Paper Misfeed T his section describes how to clear a paper misfeed when one occurs A CAUTION When removing misfed paper do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot Wo a ae Oo 6 rz oH ik Important Hold a misfed sheet with both hands and slowly pull it out Do not use a tool such as a screwdriver or tweezers as this may damage the unit Ff Note If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part of the machine Check all areas described in this section Clearing a Feed in the Main Unit Pull the top release lever 1 and open the top unit 2 Pull out the toner cassette P Note e Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle e Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 91 TROUBLESHOOTING Push back the blue paper release lever located on the right Ka Note The lever releases pressure on the paper If you do not push it back you could damage the machine when removing paper Pull out the misfed paper in the direc tions indicated by the arrows in the il lustrations Note e If you are using the paper feed unit op tion and cannot clear the misfeed using this procedure use the procedure on page 93 instead e If
202. ines Dirty ADF transport path Clean the ADF transport path p 49 on printed output when using the ADF Output too light Low contrast original Adjust the print density Unclear photographic Copyingin Text Fine Mode Use the Copy Mode keyto select p 33 images the Photo1 or Photo2 Mode Parts of the original The correct paper size is Specify the paper size using the p 19 image are not copied not specified operation panel m OO oc O I ig O 41 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages Top unit is open Close the top unit Add paper Machine is out of paper Load paper and set the copy p 10 18 quantity again during a copyjob Toner near end Machine is almost out of Prepare a toner cassette forre toner placement Add Toner Toner cassette is notloaded Correctly load the toner cassette p 2 correctly into the machine Machine is out of toner Replace the toner cassette and p 50 set the copy quantity again dur ing a copy job Clear paper Paper misfeed Remove the misfed paper and p 43 set the copy quantity again dur ing a copy job Memory overflow Not enough memory ca Either lower the printer driver s pacity Resolution setting or increase memory capacity by installing a larger SIMM Press any opera tion panel key to clear the error message from the display Remove original when Original misfeed Remove the original from the ADF p 47 original is setin ADF and set t
203. ints Do not change these settings SWITCH 03 Exol ti Available XPpianauon Settings 7 Do not change these settings 102 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Function List p22 Slow 4800p FH 5l Page Header Summer Time RDS Mode 52 User Parameters Do 103 l lt S Z T O Lu H 00 REFERENCE TECHNICAL REFERENCE Selecting the Language Help 1 Press Orunction Prt Help List OK Help JKL Press OKC and press Zoom 4 or lt Q Zoom until the desired language appeals aro Note 1 Set up 2 Do not turn off the machine while Regis tered is displayed e Ifyou do not press OK Q the setting is not changed 5 Press Opincton to return to the standby display 104 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Economy Mode Economy mode is a power saving feature and is turned on by default If no operation is performed for 5 minutes the display becomes blank and all the indicators go out If no operation is performed in the next 10 minutes or 235 minutes according to the setting the heater turns off eonomymode penton panel Heater turns off after turns of after ON default setting 15 minutes including time when operation panel is off 240 minutes including time when operation panel is off 2 Note e In Economy Mode the heater turns back on in the following cases When any key on the operation panel is pressed When paper is set in or removed from the upper paper tr
204. ion e TEL for an optional handset when sharing the line with a telephone 1 Plug the line cable into the LINE socket at the rear of the machine 2 Connect the other end of the line cable to your telephone line wall socket If you have the optional telephone hand set now do the following Plug the telephone handset cable into the TEL socket at the rear of the ma chine 4 Connect the other end of the telephone handset cable to your telephone Note If you wish to also be able to receive incom ing telephone calls you must set the Recep tion mode to Telephone Choosing a Reception Mode see page 45 SETTING UP Turning On the Machine A WARNING Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cable Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cable with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Oo m lt H LLI dp a Fk Important Whenever you turn on the machine make sure that no paper is loaded beforehand Attach the power cable to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet SF Note You can select your preferred language used on the operation panel and on reports Turn on t
205. itch 02 9 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 6 To toggle the value of a single bit press PEON 0 2 the number on the numeric keypad that corresponds to the number of the bit you wish to change E g press bs to change bit 3 Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear Hf Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel T Please wait Registered E Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Help Function to return to standby mode Be Select ee User Parameter Switch Summary T he following tables summarize the U ser Parameter bit switches and their meanings SWITCH 00 2 Available p emaon iaa on e Ez scanned when faxing 0 210 mm 44 210mm A4 This setting takes effect a document 1 216mm ai from the next power on Display Original left on 0 Yes glass Warning when scan ning from the ADF and an D is left on the expo sure glass Maximum length of docu 0 400mm 400mm This setting takes effect ment oo scanning from 1 1200mm from the next power on the AD amor y print the 0 No Transmission Result Report 1 Yes after every successful trans mission 100 TECHNICAL REFERENCE SWITCH 00 2 2 Available Explanation Settings oz y print the 0 No Journal after every 35 com 1 Yes munications
206. its printer driver on your computer The printer driver can be found on the diskette that comes with the machine U se the following procedure to install the printer driver Note e The following procedure assumes that you are already familiar with basic computer operations If you aren t consult the documentation that comes with your computer and its operating system e Refer to online help and Read me file of the printer driver e Perform the procedures under Connecting to a computer p 7 and Load ing Paper p 10 before trying to perform the following procedures To install the printer driver under Windows 95 1 If the New Hardware Found window is open click Cancel to close it 2 Quit all applications EJ The next step you should perform depends on whether you are installing from diskette lt To install from diskette follow these steps gt Insert the diskette into your computer s floppy disk drive usually named A or B e Click Start and then Run Type A INSTALL replace A with the name of your disk drive if it is different and then click OK e Follow the instructions that appear on your computer screen Note that installa tion takes a few minutes After it is complete remove the diskette from your computer s drive O H Z o A o 23 PRINTING To install the printer driver under Windows 3 1x 1 Quit all applications except Program Manager Press
207. its vinyl bag A CAUTION Keep all plastic bags out of the reach of chil dren ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Ff Note Keep the vinyl bag for later repackaging when necessary Ey Holding the starter toner cassette by its handle gently shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side SETTING UP Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step Ej on either side of the starter toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine Note Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle 6 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into place Ff Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette 1 SETTING UP Unlocking the Scanner Lock ik Important Be sure to unlock the scanner lock before using the machine The machine will not operate correctly if the scanner lock is not unlocked Unlock the scanner lock which is located at the back of the machine 4 oe oe e SETTING UP Installing the Upper Paper Tray Look at the rear of the machine and note the loc
208. ke sure the hooks on the sides of the SIMM board snap securely into place Replace the cover by inserting its tabs into the holes provided as shown in the illustration 24 3 PRINTING AND SCANNING W hen connected to a compatible PC you can use this machine as a high performance laser printer and black and white scanner Important e Make sure that your PC parallel port is set to ECP If it is not please consult your PC manual on how to change it Note e For information on PC hardware and software requirements please read the README file on the CD e Printer drivers are provided for both Windows 95 98 and Windows 3 1 but the scanning feature requires Windows 95 98 Setting up Before you can start printing and scanning you need to the following if you have not done so already e Connect the machine to your PC e Install the software drivers on your PC Installing the Software Drivers Follow the steps below to install the printer scanner drivers on your PC a H ra oc A 1 Switch the machine on o AND SCANNING 2 Make sure the machine is connected to your PC and paper is loaded in the upper paper tray Connecting to a computer see page 7 Loading Paper see page l
209. ks damaged or breaks down smoke is coming out there is a Strange smell or anything looks unusual immediately turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall Do not continue using the machine in this condition Contact your service representative If metal liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord Contact your service representative Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flower pots glasses on the machine If the contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur Do not incinerate used toner or toner cassettes Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics JA CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over it could cause injury When you move the machine unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock When the machine is not be used for a long time unplug the power cord When you pull out the plug from the socket grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Do not reuse stap
210. lace the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over it could cause injury J If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Location Environment O J o oe 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F Humidity 15 to 80 30 to 70 e The machine must be level within 3mm 0 11 both front to rear and left to right Locations to Avoid e Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light more than 2000 lux e Areas exposed to cool or heated air from air conditioners heaters etc Sudden tem perature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine e Areas where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration e Areas higher than 2500m 8 221 feet above sea level Machine Clearance Place the machine near the wall outlet providing minimum Min180mm 7 09 clearance as shown Min50mm SETTING UP Installing the Starter Toner Cassette C Raise the document trap 2 Lift up the tabs located on the sides of the machine and open the front unit 2 Hold the starter toner cassette by its handle and remove it from its vinyl bag A CAUTION Keep all plastic bags out of the reach of chil dren ik Important Be sure to hold the starter toner cassette by its handle Note Keep the vinyl bag for later repackaging when necessary Ey Holding the starter toner cassette by its handle gently shake
211. lan ADR e selva srameatantaaaaenn 1 Small size paper cessent 13 Oee e e 15 Poca O iness nd desea manta tuautatar th dees l Meral PAIE 17 19 Multiple COPIES roait shannon 71 NAMIC KEY iersterc nces cessation xiv Name Dials Deleting Name Dial aizcsasvuec isch 6l Dialling Name Dial sssre 62 Storing Name Dial c secsessescsescesssecseenee 59 Numeri keypad cccccsssscssscsscssesssssessecsnssensense xii OK KET NOS xiii OOO Kee tre Se oNN a N 52 On hook dial key 1235 25844 ws ssancsoumonmanassenuns xiv Operation Panel oes cect aaaadeaancon annie X xii xiv Original Setting Exposure glass veces 41 70 DEHLI e hens S82 f MI aes 40 78 Requirements ADF ssaicaisirainivncni 79 Oreal SME sre A X Original type select key cccsssescesseessecsesnees xiii Otat CAV ste te te ataceal Chet cdal Peas aatattee en tal X Output tray extension sssi x 6 Q Page headet ss 68 Paper and other media ssctscecocse asians eases 10 Paper select key ssssssssssssssssssseererseeeressssssssssss xiii paper size CRANS DO checcieses soca cusccacsancesccensnauaoiatee ates 20 Specifying upper sen 13 15 INDEX Specifying lower ssn 19 Paper size indicator sscscsrassreceeciesssrennseenitervens 17 19 Paper feed unit s ur 17 Pause Redial key Gi Sestcpnai i tint tnortet nso Seadeones xiv EUS CR co ETE ETT AO Serene ene 43 PC Interface indicator s es xiii Phoil srn 76 POU ee eaees cae ete ence taeenerced 76 P
212. led paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or any other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur When removing misfed paper or replacing the toner cassette and the clean ing pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies Energy Star program Energy Star As an Energy Star partner we have determined that longi this machine model meets the Fnergy Star Guide lines for energy efficiency The Energy Star Guidelines intend to establish an international energy saving system for developing and introducing energy efficient office equipment to deal with environmen tal issues such as global warning When a product meets the Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency the Partner shall place the Energy Star logo onto the machine model This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with printing equipment by means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode Low Power Mode This machine automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after the last printing job has been completed To exit Low Power mode press any key on the operation panel The machine returns to the ready condition in about 22 seconds To change the low Power delay see page 60 Specification pe 2 Power consumption Low Power Mode E
213. lem with the machine and you cannot resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter please contact your service representative Ifan Error XX message is displayed be sure to turn off the machine before calling 86 TROUBLESHOOTING When the Receive File Indicator is Lit T his indicator lights to inform you that a page of an incoming fax message could not be printed for some reason e g paper has run out and that page has been stored in memory Important The machine cannot receive any more messages until you solve the problem Turning off the power will erase any message stored in memory 1 Q H OO y o n oH To print the page out check the display and rectify the problem e g paper has run out When the problem is resolved the page will automatically be printed out ifs Note If there is not enough memory all or some parts of the message will not be stored or printed The machine will only store a page in memory if a problem occurs while reception is in process The line will be disconnected immediately and following pages of the same message will not be received 87 TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Paper Misfeed T his section describes how to clear a paper misfeed when one occurs CAUTION When removing misfed paper do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot ik Important Hold a misfed sheet with both hands and slowly pull it out Do not use a tool such
214. m decrease or Zoom oL increase until the desired size ratio appears 100 01 Start Ey Press to perform the copy op eration Note Clear Modes Press to clear the setting after copying 32 COPYING Adjusting the Copy Image To select the resolution photo setting 1 Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover O Press the Copy Mode key to specify the resolution or halftoning method for the copy operation TextFine Photol Photo2 tb large Paper Select Ey A pointer Y moves on the display to indicate the current setting The following describes when you should use each setting ee Text Fine Photo Photo2 es es large Paper Select Text ne Copying text Photo1 Copying photographs Photo2 Copying mixed text and photographs Note If the memory size of your machine is 4MB the machine automatically switches from Photo2 to Photol in the following cases Memory Co Sort M C when the O d Type 1 or Si Oo lt gt a e O lt p Type 2 key is on when you make multiple copies using the ADF Type 2 only Start Press to perform the copy op wy eration D Start u Press ANO to clear the setting after copying 33 COPYING To adjust the image density Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the s
215. mbers e Name Dial list of Name Dial labels and numbers Help 1 Press Function Prt Help List P 2 Press Zoom Gr Function no Press 2s A2 Dae LISE a Z a LL Press Start 4 Press OK Q i Start Press ar PELNE LNG ees Transmission Result Report By default this report is turned off If you turn it on this report will be printed after every fax you send T he following information is listed e From Owner this machine s fax number identification e To the destination fax number identification e Page s number of pages in document e Date Time when the communication took place 6 ee FAXING e Duration how long the communication lasted e Result whether the transmission was successful To turn automatic printing of this report on or off see Customising Default Set tings with the User Parameters see page 100 Error Report By default this report is printed automatically if a reception or transmis sion fails T he following information is given e From Owner the sender s fax number identification e To the receiver s fax number identification e Date Time when the communication failure happened Duration how long the communication lasted Reason for error Power Failure Report If power is lost while sending a message receiving a message or while a message has been stored in memory when the Receive File indicator is lit this report
216. misfed original Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place if Important If copying was in progress be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again Paper feed unit Use the following procedure when the misfed paper cannot be removed using the procedure on page 43 for Type 1 or page 45 for Type 2 1 Pull out the paper tray ee 48 TROUBLESHOOTING P Pull out the misfed paper EJ Slide the paper tray back into the paper feed unit until it locks into place Note For how to set paper in the optional paper feed unit see page 16 T Tip If you cannot find a remedy for unexpected printout results here check the printer driver s online help for other useful information When paper will not feed If paper has completely stopped feeding check using the following proce dure Please keep this sheet in a secure place together with the O peration M anual 1 Remove all paper Pull the top release lever G and open the top unit 39 M 5 k OO y o EI w TROUBLESHOOTING EJ Pull out the toner cassette 4 Pull the blue key shaped pawl located deep inside on the right where the toner cassette was set forward Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Close the top unit When the top unitis closed the motor will start running When the sound of the motor stops set paper in the origi nal position and continue with normal operation 50 6
217. n reports to help you keep track of machine usage e If you make a mistake when entering a value press the Zoom and Zoom keys to position the cursor and enter the value again Help Press oer 1 penn Prt Help List gt Press Zoom 2 O gt Function no EJ Press 11 Date Time Enter another function number Press Help Function to return to standby mode Firmes Odie i3 A 4 Press OK Q Year 99 Press OK E Q Year DO 6 Enter the year on the numeric keypad E g to enter the year 2000 press P P Montu 02 Press OK Q Month Cis 8 Enter the month on the numeric keypad E g press P 5s Devs 01 38 FAXING Press OK y 9 Q Day oe Enter the date on the numeric keypad E g press Ds bs Registered Press OKC The display opposite will 1 Set up g flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear Ka Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 12 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press O iincion to return to standby mode Turning Summer Time Daylight Saving Time on off T his feature is useful if local custom requires advancing or setting the clock back One minute after you turn Summer Time on the clock advances by an hour Similarly one minute after you turn Summer Time off the clock is put back an hour For how to switch this feature on or off see Changing On
218. ncsiveececiathacicue teaaenenteee 74 Zoom In 1 INCrements err a a a ehe ten 75 TOUSE ZOOM naa E hat canna hia 75 ANGUISH he Copy Mima 86 ise towrsas seen othr anditadedcchidenet a doeetntaateals 76 To Select the Resolution Photo Setting ccccccssesesseeeeeeeeeeeees 76 To Adjust the Imase Density siciscovsstocdeaciaczecatossssuvaassevaascdentaniaestess 71 SOLDE OUMU era eo a Ea I n S 78 SOn COP y 18 aens masanatentddottubaeeatssanedlusereeacsanaasnacesdates 78 TROUBLESHOOTING Gee elle es tear career Sect cadet ce nar en aca Satanic teeter 80 Pinne and COp yin 8 sirenen Na 80 PONUD ee useable aout iia Nic iahiiaties inca 81 C pyine and Faxing oren a a a 82 SCE cae es a a ea 83 Error IWICSSACES x sscnecscesses asad sn uatadenven a a a 84 When the Receive File Indicator is Lit cccececssseeesesseeeeeees 87 Ceann d Paper Mislecd ussidiana a 88 Clearing a Feed in the Main Unit ccc ceeeesessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 88 Clearing a Misteed mi the ADE s cccimcciaclenthsuics Giloovetitunexeonimerveceousios 90 Clearing a Misfeed in the Optional Paper Feed Unit 000000 90 When Paper Will Not Peed scent e naiciaciesis 91 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance sese a iatastua tein Taasten es 93 Replacing the Toner Cassette and the Cleaning Pad 00008 94 SOA Ceea sete onarie A E 97 Pap T a e a A 97 TOn r as e Ee a N 97 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Prntime the Help Elst jcciciceieiees eaten tcicnaciesai
219. ne is turned machine before the ma chine off and then back on Af on for the first time chine was turned on ter machine initialization is after the installation complete load the paper back into the machine After installing a SIMM SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required board the memory required specifications specifications value that appears on the machine s display does not match the amount of memory in stalled Printing and Copying 1 2 C sus cause Remedy Page Frequent paper mis The upper paper trayis not Set the upper paper tray cor p 4 feeds set correctly rectly Improper paper Use paper ofthe correct size and thickness Paper is not fed correctly Realign the paper with the pa from the upper paper tray per guide and if necessary take care for the paper to be fed cor rectly Paper is curled or damp Uncurl the paper Insert paper into the upper paper tray from the least curled side Set paper face down ifnecessary p 10 12 18 Avoid using damp paper Too much paper is loaded Remove some of the paper p 10 14 in the machine Paper is loaded incorrectly Check the paper and realign it p 10 18 if necessary aS ms i OO oc O I is O TROUBLESHOOTING Printing and Copying 2 2 saws Cause remedy Page Frequent paper mis Attempting to printon both Printon onlyone side Two side p 10 18 feeds sides of the paper ee is n
220. next to step above on either side of the toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 10 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into place PH Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette 32 USER MAINTENANCE Storage Z lt cr TT V To Paper Paper should always be stored properly Improperly stored paper might result in poor image reproduction creased copies or paper misfeeds G en erally avoid paper curling and absorption of moisture TENANCE e Avoid storing paper in humid areas In high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity conditions store paper in a vinyl bag Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat Store on a flat surface Use older stock first Do not lay heavy objects on paper Keep open reams of paper in the package and store as you would unopened paper Toner Cassette Keep the toner cassette inside the packaging thatit comes packed in whenever itis removed from the machine Store horizontally in a cool dark place Never store a toner cassette where it will be exposed to heat Do not lay heavy objects on the toner cassette CAUTION Keep toner cassettes out of children s reach 5 ee 7 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Prin
221. ng 26 4 COPYING Making a Copy Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover O Start Press C to perform the copy opera tion ik Important After copying a large number of pages wait a couple of minutes before attempting to turn off the machine FH Note When printing to label paper envelopes transparencies or thin paper 60 g m or 16 lb remove each printout as it comes out of the machine If you don t printed output can fall out of the output tray and become curled Alignment of Originals Align the original with the scale of the exposure glass e When the original is a standard size such as A4 or Letter align it to the indexes on the scale 4 COPYING e When your original is not standard size align the upper left edge of the original to the ar row mark on the scale For Type 2 Users e When the original is smaller than the paper you are copying to place a second sheet of paper that is larger than the paper you are copying to on top of the original when you place the original onto the exposure glass 2 COPYING Making Multiple Copies You can specify the number of copies to be printed by pressing Of to increase the number or Q2own to reduce the number Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover O Up
222. not con Correctly connect the power when the machine is nected Cable to the machine and plug turned on it into a outlet SIMM is notinstalled correctly Install the SIMM correctly SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required p 23 required specifications specifications Paper misfeeds when Paper was loaded in the Remove the paper turn the ma the machine is turned machine before the ma chine off and then back on Af on for the first time chine was turned on ter machine initialization is after the installation complete load the paper back into the machine After installing a SIMM SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required board the memory required specifications specifications value that appears on the machine s display does not match the amount of memory in Stalled Printing and Copying 1 2 status cause Remedy Page Frequent paper mis The upper paper trayis not Set the upper paper tray cor p 4 feeds set correctly rectly Improper paper Use paper ofthe correct sizeand p 10 thickness Paper is notset correctly in Realign the paper with the pa the upper paper tray per guide and if necessary fan the paper stack Paper is curled or damp Uncurl the paper Set paper face down ifnecessary p 11 13 19 Avoid using damp paper Too much paper is loaded Remove some of the paper p 11 15 in the machine Paper is loaded incorrectly Check t
223. nt stack face down into the ADE Press lt Zoom decrease or Zoom oL increase until the desired i l 100 01 size ratio appears 99 01 Start EX Press C to perform the copy opera tion 2 Note After copying finishes press clear any settings Clear Modes 19 Oo lt gt Oo e O Ts COPYING Adjusting the Copy Image To Select the Resolution Photo Setting Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE 2 Press the Original Type Select key to specify the resolution or halftoning method for the copy operation Sort Text Photo Photo ory Copy Text Fine 1 2 3 A pointer Y moves on the display to indicate the current setting Choose a setting that matches your original Sort Text Photo Photo ory Copy Text Fine 1 2 TEL Text Fine Copying text Photo1 Copying photographs Photo2 Copying mixed text and photographs Note If the memory size of your machine is 4MB the machine automatically switches from Photo2 to Photol when you make multiple copies using the ADF Start Press to perform the copy opera A tion Start H Note Clear Modes After copying finishes press to clear any settings 76 COPYING To Adjust the Image Density 1 Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADE 2 Press the Density key to select the im age density Select Lighter to make the image lighter Auto Image Density Li
224. nts fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur Do notincinerate used toner or toner cassettes Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics JA CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over it could cause injury When you move the machine unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock When the machine is not be used for a long time unplug the power cord When you pull out the plug from the socket grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or any other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur When removing misfed paper or replacing the toner cassette and the clean ing pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies Energy Star program Energy Star As an Energy Star partner we have determined that lonu this machine model meets the Energy Star Guide lines for energy efficiency Th
225. oe AND SCANNING Loading Paper See page 10 2 Switch the machine on EJ Insert the provided software CD into your CD ROM drive 23 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Do one of the following according to your operating system Windows 95 98 Run the setup application For example if your CD ROM is assigned to D run D Scan in Setup exe Windows 3 1 First copy the disk images under the directory named 3 1 on the CD ROM to floppy disks Then insert the first floppy disk into your floppy disk drive and run install exe FH Note e You cannot install from CD ROM under Windows 3 1 e Only the printer driver will be installed under Windows3 1 5 Follow the instructions that appear on the display For detailed information on how to print and scan from your PC please refer to the online help provided 24 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver Printer Driver Contents E Paper Defaults Paper size Size Measurement Unit Page orientation Portrait Landscape Output Copies Print in reverse order Paper source Source About E N Up Printing Select a Layout Option Normal Reduce for N up printing Print page borders 2 pages up sheet 4 pages up sheet E Document Document Type Settings Automatic Photo Desktop High Speed Business Grayscale Publishing Draft Graphics Font Resolutonlap 600 6 600 30 6 E Job Settings True Type
226. of memory in Stalled Printing and Copying 1 2 Sus cause Remedy Page Frequent paper mis The upper paper trayis not Set the upper paper tray cor feeds set correctly rectly Improper paper Use paper ofthe correctsizeand p 10 thickness Paper is notsetcorrectlyin Realign the paper with the pa the upper paper tray per guide and if necessary fan the paper stack Paper is curled or damp Uncurl the paper Set paper face down ifnecessary p 11 13 19 Avoid using damp paper fa Too much paper is loaded Remove some of the paper p 11 15 in the machine Paper is loaded incorrectly Check the paper and realign it p 11 19 if necessary Insert paper into the upper paper tray from the least curled side 82 TROUBLESHOOTING Printing and Copying 2 2 sus Cause memey Page Frequent paper mis Attempting to printon both Printon onlyone side Two side p 11 19 feeds sides of the paper printing is not supported by this machine Printing onto loosely Flatten the envelopes to expelall p 15 stacked envelopes air Misfeeding of the envelope Make sure that envelope flaps p 15 flap are closed folded down Part of the image is Toner is distributed un Remove the toner cassette gen p 97 unclear evenlyin the toner cassette tly rock it left and right a few Wo aul E 09 rz oH times and replace it into the machine Black lines on the Heat damage to the ton
227. of the current mode to their initial defaults Holding down this key for about one second switches the Economy Mode on and off Refer to Economy Mode on page 58 4 OK Press this key to execute an operation that is prompted by a message on the display 3 Zoom In copy mode press these keys to fine tune the preset reduction and enlargement ratios Also use to select function settings and navigate the function menus Economy Mode Clear Modes Help Function Press this key and then input a function number to perform various settings and help list printing functions 5 Copy Mode key Press this key to specify the Copy Mode A pointer W appears on the display to indicate the current Text Fine Photol Photo2 setting Display Displays messages and prompts during operation 7 Memory Copy Type 1 only Press this key to select Memory Copy Your original will be scanned only once when making multiple copies Sort Memory Copy Type 2 only Press this key to turn Sorting and Memory Copy on and off Sorting is activated when the pointer is visible on the display above Sort Memory Copy Xi GENERAL H am Q V Lu OQ xii 1 SETTING UP Package Contents M ake sure that all of the items shown in the Package C ontents sheet that comes with the machine are included A WARNING Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event o
228. on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur A _ O Z H _ Lu p i Fk Important Whenever you turn on the machine make sure that no paper is loaded beforehand Attach the power cable to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet iaa iro o a Du aY AAA 2 Turn on the machine P Note You can select your preferred language used on the operation panel and on reports Selecting the Language see page 107 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Important The default display language is English For how to change to your preferred language see page 107 Paper and Other Media T he machine supports printing on the following types of paper media from the upper paper tray Refer to the following pages for details Transparencies p 15 Label paper 2 Note Do not attempt to use the following types of paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper paper containing carbon carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or other very thin paper D Q Q pa A v Q Q D gt lt LLI A CAUTION Do not reuse stapled paper Do not use aluminium foil paper containing carbon or other conductive paper Otherwise a fire might occur 10 GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Paper After you have s
229. ond printer is connected ik Important If the second printer has a Bi Direction mode make sure to set the Bi Direction mode to Off Note Refer to page 15 for details on connecting a second printer To print to the second printer Second Printer Press Q The Second Printer indicator lights PC interface ik Important T second Printer Whenever you change printers be sure to also si gt change to the appropriate printer driver on your computer 2 Note While the Second Printer Indicator is lit print data from your computer passes through the machine to the second printer Perform the required print operation with the application you are using 26 4 COPYING Making a Copy Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Start Press C to perform the copy opera tion ik Important After copying a large number of pages be sure not to turn off the machine in several minutes Q Note When printing to label paper envelopes transparencies or thin paper 60 g m or 16 lb remove each printout as it comes out of the machine If you don t printed output can fall out of the output tray which can cause it to become curled Alignment of Originals Align the original with the scale of the exposure glass e When the original is a standard size such as A4 or Letter align it to the indexes on the scale 4 COPY
230. one side of the tray by gently bending the document tray until it fits in the insert hole Make sure the small pieces of plastic film curl upwards as shown ik Important The original will not be delivered properly if the films are not set as shown SETTING UP Connecting to a computer ik Important Make sure that the power of both the machine and your computer is turned off before making the connection 1 Plug one end of the your printer cable into the lower port on the side of the machine and secure it in place as shown in the illustration 1 SETTING UP P Note e The machine must be connected to a computer for printing e Use the cable that comes with the machine to connect to your computer SETTING UP Turning On the Machine A WARNING Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cord Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Fik Important When you turn on the machine for the first time after the installation make sure that no paper is loaded beforehand Attach the power cord to the machine and plug the other end into a outlet 2 Turn on the machine
231. opy Operation Mode T hismachine has two modes fax operation mode and copy operation mode You can still receive fax messages when the machine is in copy operation mode but if you wish to send a fax you must make sure the machine is in fax operation mode To switch back and forth between copy operation mode and fax operation mode press lt Fox Q Copy Lighte A gt Paper Select 5a CODY T he Fax and C opy indicators indicate which mode the machine is currently in 2 Note When the machine automatically switches to Economy Mode all indicators turn off Press any key to exit Economy mode Economy Mode see page 105 You can select the default mode the machine starts in See User Parameters on page 100 29 Oo Z a Li lt q FAXING Entering Characters on the Operation Panel Entering Numbers Enter digits when dialling inputting or fax numbers specifying function codes or registering various information such as your own fax number To enter digits P 9 press the appropriate key on the numeric keypad E g to enter the number 12345678 press 2 3 45 5565 E E 123453076 Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 42 Entering Letters Symbols and Spaces W hen the display asks you enter a name you can use the numeric keypad to enter characters and symbols To enter a character press the appropriate key on the numeric keypad until the character appears Then press the Zoom 4
232. or faxing capabilities and wide a range of powerful fax features H ere are some of the things you can do e Send and receive fax messages e Store fax numbers you often use and recall them with a single key press e Redial the previous fax number e Share your fax line with a telephone e Keep track of machine usage through printed reports e Customise default settings to suit your requirements Note Please read the Setup section before you start It explains how to set up the fax feature to suit your needs Switching between Fax Operation and Copy Operation Mode T his machine has two modes fax operation mode and copy operation mode You can still receive fax messages when the machine is in copy operation mode but if you wish to send a fax you must make sure the machine is in fax operation mode To switch back and forth between copy operation mode and fax operation mode press lt Fox Q Copy Lighte 7 Paper Select 1 COPY T he Fax and C opy indicators indicate which mode the machine is currently in Note When the machine automatically switches to Economy Mode all indicators turn off Press any key to exit Economy mode Economy Mode see page 108 You can select the default mode the machine starts in See User Parameters on page 102 29 Oo Z a LL FAXING Entering Characters on the Operation Panel Entering Numbers Enter digits when dialling inputting or fax numbers specifying function co
233. ort Memory Copy Copy Press QO to select sort ing on and off no pointer lt gt a e O lt p Sort Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge 37 COPYING Start Ey When you press C to start the copy operation all of the originals on the ADF are scanned into memory before they are printed FH Note Clear Modes Press to clear the setting after copying 38 _ Start 5 TROUBLESHOOTING General Nothing happens Power cord is not con Correctly connect the power when the machine is_ nected cord to the machine and plug it turned on into a outlet SIMM is not installed correctly Install the SIMM correctly SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required p 21 required specifications specifications Paper misfeeds when Paper was loaded in the Remove the paper turn the ma the machine is turned machine before the ma chine off and then back on Af on for the first time chine was turned on ter machine initialization is after the installation complete load the paper back into the machine After installing a SIMM SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required board the memory required specifications specifications value that appears on the machine s display does not match the amount of memory in Stalled Printing and Copying 1 2 Status cause Remeay Page Frequent paper mis The upper paper trayis not Set the upper paper tray cor
234. ot incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specified supplies A CAUTION When replacing the toner cassette and cleaning pad do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot Open the box of the new toner cassette and check to make sure it contains a toner cassette and cleaning pad H Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its han dle Pull the top release lever G1 and open the top unit lt cr TT N mm N TENANCE USER MAINTENANCE 3 Hold the toner cassette by its handle and pull it out Note Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner Ea 5 2 if Remove the old cleaning pad LE 4 NI RA Note Be sure to grasp the green handle when re moving the cleaning pad TA Grasp the new cleaning pad by the green INE BAN handle and insert it into place y 2V Press down gently but firmly on both wh N 6 AA D y sides of the pad to make sure that it is inserted as far as it can go Do not forget to install the cleaning pad whenever you install a new toner cassette VY Prepare the new toner cassette Hold ing the toner cassette by its handle gen tly shake it side
235. ot supported by this machine Printing on an envelope an sure that envelopes are p that is too thick an ded flat id of the envelope Make sure that envelope il all are closed folded down Part of the image is is distributed un Remove the toner cassette gen unclear evenly in the toner cassette tly rock it left and right a few times and replace it into the machine Black lines on the Heat damage to the toner Replace the toner cassette printout cassette caused by turning off the machine too soon after copying a large number of pages Dark areas along the Turning off the machine too Replace the toner cassette sides of the printout soon after printing or copy ing a large number of pages Printing Abnormal or unex Use of wrong cable Use the cable that comes with pected printing results this machine Wrong printer driver set Change to the correct printer p 23 tings driver settings oe to print from a Change to 300 dpi p 56 DOS application at 600 dpi Parts of the image are The correct paper size is Specify the por size using the not printed out not specified operation panel Cannot print from a Second printer is not con Check connections and make second printer nected correctly corrections if necessary Second Printer Second printer is not se Press Q so the indi p 26 lected cator above itis lit Incorrect settings of the Use the printer driver
236. our conversation as usual Faxing During a Telephone Call You can also have the machine take over the line and send or receive a fax message at the end of your telephone call T his is useful when e The other party shares their line with a similar fax machine and you wish to send or receive a mes sage after your conversation e You wish to check that the number is indeed a fax number before attempting to send your message 2 Note The other party s machine must support this feature 1 Do one of the following Pick up the telephone handset and dial with the handset keypad Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode pick up the telephone handset and dial using the operation panel numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press the On Hook key and dial using a Quick Dial a Name Dial or the Pause Redial key When the other party answers pick up the telephone handset H Note In some locales On Hook dialling is not available and or you cannot dial using a Quick Dial Name Dial the number keys or Redial key when the handset is lifted 50 FAXING Listen to the line Ifa voice answers continue your conversation as normal When you wish to send a fax listen for the fax tone of the other party then continue from step E below e When you wish to receive a fax listen for the fax tone of the other party then continue from step E
237. p A eration D Start PH Note Clear Modes Press O to clear the setting after copying Z gt a e O ef COPYING Zoom in 1 Increments Zoom allows you to tune the preset reduction and enlargement factors to ex actly the value you want You can change the zoom factor in increments of 1 To use zoom Setting Range Help Help Function Function Zoom gt Zoom oL OKC 200 to 50 50 to 200 Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press lt Zoom decrease or Zoom oL increase until the desired size ratio appears 100 01 Start 99 01 Press to perform the copy op E i i w eration Start Note lear Mod Press CO to clear the setting after copying 32 COPYING Adjusting Copy Image To select the resolution photo setting 1 Lift the platen cover Place the Original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover 2 Press the Copy Mode key to specify the resolution or halftoning method for the copy operation e TextFine Photol Photo2 C large Paper Select EJ A pointer Y moves on the display to indicate the current setting The following describes when you should use each setting TextFine Photol Photo2 O a large Paper Select Text Fine Copying text Photo1 Copying photogr
238. p 4 feeds set correctly rectly Improper paper Use paper ofthe correct size and thickness Paper is notset correctly in Realign the paper with the pa the upper paper tray per guide and if necessary fan the paper stack Paper is curled or damp Uncurl Uncurlthe paper Uncurlthe paper Insert paper into the upper paper tray from the least curled side Set paper face down ifnecessary p 10 12 18 Avoid using damp paper Too much paper is loaded Remove some of the paper in the machine Paper is loaded incorrectly Check the paper and realign it p 10 18 if necessary 3g w0 k OO y o I w 39 TROUBLESHOOTING Printing and Copying 2 2 Frequent paper mis Attempting to printon both Print on only one side Two side p 10 18 feeds sides of the paper printing is not supported by this machine lall Printing onto loosely Flatten the envelopes to expe p 14 stacked envelopes air Misfeeding of the envelope Make sure that envelope flaps p 14 flap are closed folded down Part of the image is Toner is distributed un Remove the toner cassette gen p unclear evenlyin the toner cassette tly rock it left and right a few times and replace it into the machine Black lines on the Heat damage to the toner Replace the toner cassette printout cassette caused by turning off the machine too soon after copying a large number of pages Dark areas along the Turningof
239. p List Print this list to get a quick guide to frequently used fax features 1 While the machine is not performing any Pro Help Ligt 9 other operation press Oon 4 5 Press OKC 2 ii Q Press Start Start Ey Press C to print the Help List Note Print on A4 Letter or Legal paper Start 98 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Customising Default Settings with the User Parameters Changing the User Parameters T he User Parameters allow you to customise various machine settings and features to suit your requirements T hey are four U ser Parameter Switches numbered 00 to 03 Each switch has 8 adjustable bits which can set to either 0 or 1 7654 3210 amp bit number Switch number gt 00 0000 1011 bit values For the meaning of each bit and how changing them affects the machine see page XX Ff Note Take care when changing the switch values Only change the bits whose mean ings are described in this manual H Note Do not turn off the power while adjusting the User Parameter bit switches REFERENCE l lt 9 Z T O Lu H 00 T he following procedure describes how to change the U ser Parameters Help Press a 1 QFinciion Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function No Press Bs Ds 52 User Param 4 Press OK Q OO sTO OOO Sx Press lt Zoom or Z ntil 5 Q on oom Gm u aie 02 21110 0000 2 switch you wish to edit appears E g press Zoom twice to show sw
240. parencies Load only one transparency at a time using the plain paper loading proce dure on page 10 for large transparencies and the small paper loading proce dure on page 12 for small transparencies 2 Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 11 for large transparencies or page 13 for small ones To load label paper Load only 10 sheets of label paper at a time using the plain paper loading procedure on page 10 Note Refer to the paper select operation on page I GETTING ACQUAINTED Connecting a Second Printer Additional Printer T he machine features a port that you can use to connect your current printer as a second printer additional printer Once you do you have a selection of this machine or the second printer at the touch of om Printer Key FH Note Make sure that the power of your computer is turned off before making the con nection To connect to a second printer 1 Turn off both the machine and your sec ond printer Connect one end of a parallel interface cable to your second printer Connect the other end of the cable to aA the second printer port securing it in a ia place with the screws Ue lS Ae y i F Note e It requires a standard 36 pin parallel cable L compliant with IEEE 1284 e Refer to page 26 for details on using the sec ond printer A 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED GETTING ACQUAINTED Installing the Paper Feed Unit Option T hi
241. peration and return the machine to the standby state To reset printer mode hold down this key for at least 3 seconds Economy Mode Clear Modes key Pressing this key clears any selected settings to their defaults and cancels the ongoing operation Hold down this key for more than about 3 seconds to turn Economy mode on or off Economy Mode see page 105 Economy Mode indicator Lights when Economy mode is turned on Help Function key Use to print the Help List Press once and enter a number for access to various function settings Printing the Help List see page 98 Auto Image Density I Lighter Darker Zoom keys In copy mode press these keys to fine tune the preset reduction and enlargement ratios Also use to select function settings and navigate the function menus d OK key Press to enter values or execute an operation when prompted by a message on the display Original Type Select key Press to select a setting that best matches your copy original or fax document Image Type see page 76 3 Density key Press to make copies faxes lighter or darker Select Auto Image Density to let the machine choose a suitable setting Check Display indicator Blinks to alert you to read a message on the display Economy Mode Clear Modes 5 Busy indicator Lights during a fax operation and when making telephone calls PC Interface indicator Lights while the m
242. portant e Make sure that your PC parallel port is set to ECP If it is not please consult your PC manual on how to change it 2 Note e For information on PC hardware and software requirements please read the README file on the CD e Printer drivers are provided for both Windows 95 98 and Windows 3 1 but the scanning feature requires Windows 95 98 Setting up Before you can start printing and scanning you need to the following if you have not done so already e Connect the machine to your PC e Install the software drivers on your PC Installing the Software Drivers Follow the steps below to install the printer scanner drivers on your PC 1 Switch the machine on 2 Z H Z aa A se AND SCANNING 2 Make sure the machine is connected to your PC and paper is loaded in the upper paper tray Connecting to a computer see page 6 Loading Paper see page 11 Ey Insert the provided software CD into your CD ROM drive 25 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Do one of the following according to your operating system Windows 95 98 Run the setup application For example if your CD ROM is assigned to D run D Scan in Setup exe Windows 3 1 First copy the disk images under the directory named 3 1 on the CD ROM to floppy disks Then insert the first floppy disk into your floppy disk drive and run install exe Note You cannnot install from CD ROM under Windows 3 1 Only the printer d
243. r Printer Driver Contents E Paper Defaults Paper size Size Measurement Unit Page orientation Portrait Landscape Output Copies Print in reverse order Paper source Source About E Up Printing Select a Layout Option Normal Reduce for N up printing Print page borders 2 pages up sheet 4 pages up sheet E Document Document Type Settings Automatic Photo Desktop High Speed Business Grayscale Publishing Dratt Graphics Font Resolution dpi 600 f 600 600 300 60 Graphics Resolution Halttone Screening Screening Screening Screening Dithering Job Settings True Type Mode Name E Configuration Device Configuration Feeder Toner Save Mode Time out E Fonts Font Manager To add printer fonts E Overlays Overlay Assignments None All pages Odd Even pages First Other pages Cover Divider page Overlays Create New Overlay Manage Overlays Get files from other sources to use as overlays Send created overlays to other sources Rename overlays Remove overlays ik Important After printing a large number of pages be sure not to turn off the machine in several minutes Note Be sure to use online help and Read me file of the printer driver to get the most out of all the printer features and functions 25 O _ oc a o PRINTING Using the Second Printer Additional Printer Use the following procedure to switch between this machine and a second printer when a sec
244. r 80 g m 20 Ib 250 sheets Output tray Capacity plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 50 sheets Memory 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16 MB or 32 MB EDO SIMM 60 ns 72 pin Dimensions 249mm x 352mm x 576mm HxWxD 9 81 x 13 87 x 22 69 HxWxD Weight 15 0 kg 33 08 1b Paper Capacity Upper tray plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 100 sheets Option paper unit plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 250 sheets ADF Auto Document Feeder Capacity plain paper A4 IT LG 80 g m 20 Ib 10 sheets Output tray Capacity plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 50 sheets Memory 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16MB or 32MB EDO SIMM 60 ns 72 pin Dimensions 297mm x 352mm x 576mm Hx Wx D 11 70 x13 87 x 22 69 Hx Wx D Weight 15 5 kg 34 18 1b Type 1 Type 2 Power Supply AC 120 V 60 Hz Power Consumption Max Printing Average Copying Average Stand by Average PC Scan Average Economy Mode Operating Environment Temperature Humidity 10 C 50 F to 35 C 95 F 15 to 80 Machine Life 30 000 sheets 5 years Printer Duty 6 000 sheets 1 month Scanner Duty 2 000 sheets 1 month Paper Sizes Plain paper Letter IT 81 2 x 11 Legal LG 81 2 x 14 Half Letter 5 2 x 81 2 A4 210 mm x 297 mm A5 148 mm x 210 mm FH 81 4 x 13 Envelopes Executive 71 4 x 101 2 Com 10 41 8 x 91 2 Monarch 38 7 x 71 2 Transparencies Label Paper SPECIFICATIONS Printing Specifications Printer
245. r 0 05 03 XYZ CO E gs G5 95 ane GH 9 G5 g O PP PP oO O 7 LL Zoom 4 gt 252525 Zoom 4 gt 63 65 D lt zoom gt P P Zoom 4 gt A Note To clear the entire setting make sure the cursor is at the far left position then press WYZ CO Press OKC to clear the setting or press Delete 3 Help K Qhinction 0 cancel this operation 3 oo FAXING Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear Note Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Set up a Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Ohinchon to return to standby mode Setting the Dial Mode Specify the type of telephone line you are using tone or pulse dial If you are unsure of what this should be please consult your line provider If your machine is behind a PABX you should also provide the following details e The PABX number that gives you an outside dial tone You can enter 0 or a value between 01 and 99 00 is not possible e The PSTN access method This will depend on your locale and the PABX system you are using T he machine will not function correctly if these settings are not correct Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure Help Press ERS 1 QFincton Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press 2s 12 Dial Mode Oi Press OKC 4 O Mode Tone oe
246. r at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsys tems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Notes e Model names for the machines do not appear in the following pages Check the type of your ma chine before reading this manual Bizworks 106 e Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine e Certain types may not be available in some countries For details contact your local dealer Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual With this machine refer to the metric version For good print quality Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product Power Source 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 2 2 A Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above For details about power con nection refer to page 8 Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all
247. r other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks Copyright 1998 RICOH CO LTD Declaration of Conformity The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC In accordance with ISO Standard 7001 this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch means POWER ON O means POWER OFF Safety Information W hen using your machine the following safety precautions should always be followed Types of warnings used in this manual A WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death A CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property Symbol examples N The a symbol means a situation that requires you take care Q The symbol means you MUST NOT carry out this operation This example means Do not take apart Z The symbol means you MUST perform this operation This example means You must remove the wall plug A WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the
248. r the machine has scanned your document the displays opposite will appear 42 Le SOO FC Be vA RO ABC CO Bc mle bi glo pamree D Vert A4 P gt OLALIM a ai FAXING Do one of the following Ifall pages of your document have been scanned in go to step gy Set next OK 2 K0s Ifyour document contains more than one page remove the page from the exposure glass and To finish 06 set the next page before the counter on the dis Start play reaches zero Then press OK Qor Q Wait until the displays opposite appear and re peat this step for all pages in your document 2 Note You have 16 seconds to set the next page If you do not set another page the machine au tomatically finishes the transmission Por Set next OK K16 To finish a Press on the numeric keypad to fin 10 ish sending your fax message Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers You can enter pauses and tones when dialling or store them in Quick D ial and Name D ial numbers Quick Dials see page 54 Name Dials see page 59 Entering Pauses In some situations you may need to insert a pause in fax numbers For example e If your telephone line is behind a PABX you have to dial an access code to access outside numbers Oo lt a LL insert a pause between the access code and the telephone number e For international numbers enter a pause after the country code Pause Redial To enter
249. ransmission standby mode this message will appear when you next turn the machine on Either the maximum number of Name Dials have been stored 25 or you tried to enter more than 40 digits for a destination fax number The line is busy while dial ling with On Hook con Too many numbers No connection nection failed you dialled the wrong number or there is no answer The line current was not detected the line may not be connected Printer in use The machine is busy print ing Machine busy The machine is busy com municating The name you input for this Name Dial already exists No loop current Name exists The machine is unable to print the report or list be cause there is a problem with the printer Stop Press OC to clear the error message Delete some Name Dials or enter a shorter number If scanning from the exposure Stop glass press OC and remove your document When scanning from the ADE the machine will automatically enter redial mode To cancel redialling remove your document from the ADE Check the line connection Wait until it has finished and try again When until the current opera tion has finished and try again Either use a different name or delete the other Name Dial and try again Press Oprincton to exit func tion mode and rectify the prob lem indicated on the display 85 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING TROUBLESHOOT
250. ray 47 aS m i OO oc O eI PEL TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Pull out the misfed paper Ey Slide the paper tray back into the paper feed unit until it locks into place X Tip If you cannot find a remedy for unexpected printout results here check the printer driver s online help for other useful information 48 6 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance Clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry H Note Turn off the machine before cleaning Platen cover Type 1 Type 2 Exposure glass 49 Z lt cr TT V To TENANCE USER MAINTENANCE Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad Printing on A4 size paper under the recommended temperature and hu midity conditions noted in the table under C onditions on page 1 you can expect a toner cassette to print approximately 3 000 pages when you are printing typical business letters that have text covering 5 of the total sur face T he starter cassette that comes with the machine can print approxi mately 1 000 pages Pages that contain graphics use more toner and short ens the life of a toner cassette A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of the used toner cassettes according to local regulations for plastics This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier s parts and consumables We recommend you only use these specifie
251. rce Paper Select i i 1 Press O until the desired pa per sourc appears 100 U OL The upper paper tray is selected when U is on the display and the paper feed 1005 L Ol unit is selected when L is on the dis play FH Note Refer to page 10 for details on using the upper paper tray GETTING ACQUAINTED Upgrading Memory You can install Single Inline M emory M odule SIM M to upgrade the on board memory of the machine T he machine is shipped from the factory with a 4M B SIM M which can be replaced with an 8M B 16M B or 32MB SIMM U se the following procedure to install 8MB 16MB or 32MB SIMM Note The following are the required specifications for a SIMM used with this machine 72 pin 60ns Extend Date Out EDO parity non parity ik Important Make sure you touch some grounded metal object with your hand to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body before handling the SIMM 1 Turn off the machine 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Remove the SIMM cover located on the left side of the machine Pull apart the hooks on the both sides of the SIMM board that hold it in place 21 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Carefully lift out the SIMM board cur rently installed on your printer 5 Angle the new SIMM board as shown in the illustration and insert it down into the slot Gently rock it back and forth until you hear it snap into place ik Important
252. rights in those marks Copyright 1999 RICOH CO LTD Safety Information W hen using your machine the following safety precautions should always be followed Types of warnings used in this manual A WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death A CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property Symbol examples AN The A symbol means a situation that requires you take care Q The symbol means you MUST NOT carry out this operation This example means Do not take apart Z The symbol means you MUST perform this operation This example means You must remove the wall plug Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used here in are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks A WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cord Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or
253. river will be installed under Windows 3 1 5 Follow the instructions that appear on the display For detailed information on how to print and scan from your PC please refer to the online help provided 26 PRINTINGAND SCANNING Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver Printer Driver Contents E Paper Defaults Paper size Size Measurement Unit Page orientation Portrait Landscape Output Copies Print in reverse order Paper source Source About E N Up Printing Select a Layout Option Normal Reduce for N up printing Print page borders 2 pages up sheet 4 pages up sheet E Document Document Type Settings Automatic Photo Desktop High Speed Business Grayscale Publishing Draft Graphics Font Resoluton ap 600 600 00 0 600 Job Settings True Type Mode Name z s E Configuration S Device Configuration Feeder Toner Save Mode Time out A ph E Fonts oz Font Manager To add printer fonts lt E Overlays Overlay Assignments None All pages Odd Even pages First Other pages Cover Divider page Overlays Create New Overlay Manage Overlays Get files from other sources to use as overlays Send created overlays to other sources Rename overlays Remove overlays ik Important After printing a large number of pages wait a few minutes before turning off the machine FH Note Be sure to use online help and Read me file of the printer driver to get the most out of all the printer
254. rized Reception off p 47 up to only receive faxes with function 21 or read how from certdin senders with to configure this feature ihe Authorized Reception eature tu Even when you press Remote Change is not Turn it on with function 32 p 52 the Remote Change turned on igit Remo ange You are pressing the wrong The default Remote Change digit will ON UGAON Remote Change digit have is 2 If pressing this di ton the p 32 pressed a key on the handset keypad still does not Operation panel or the work try changing the Remote machine is busy dialling Change digit to another number Do not press any key on the operation pane b fore pressing the Remote Change digit If the machine is busy dialling Remote Change is not available 85 TROUBLESHOOTING a PC scanning a not The PC parallel port is not Consult your PC ae on how p 25 function properly set to ECP to set your parallel port to ECP Error Messages 1 4 The table below explains the error messages that may appear on the display and the appropriate action to take Close cover Top unit is open Close the top unit If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Add paper Machine is out of paper Load paper P 11 19 If a copy job is in progress set the copy quantity again Toner near end Machine is almost out of ibe a toner cassette for re toner placement Add Toner Toner cassette is notloaded
255. ronmen tal issues such as global warning When a product meets the Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency the Partner shall place the Energy Star logo onto the machine model This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with printing equipment by means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode Low Power Mode This machine automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after the last printing job has been completed To exit Low Power mode press any key on the operation panel The machine returns to the ready condition in about 22 seconds To change the low Power delay see page 105 Specification Power consumption 15 W Low Power Mode Economy Mode Default delay Recycled paper Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled paper types that may be used in this machine Contents Salei y Moran OM sae S a leila haw Saeakaeteess 1 Enere Star PLOSTANE siacbstultchelviseeatisdaosanGataieoes neue etna Madarceavencts iv PUCAO SLs sticscies cesta a settee ees X Operador Pane leaa a A xii 1 SETTING UP Package COnlen arien a a E leeruadeewren l LOCI Osor a a l Installing the Starter Toner Cassette cccccccccccccccceeesstssssseeeseeeeees 2 Installing Other Hardware cccccssssececceceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeees 4 Removing the Protective Sheet nnneeessessessssssssssssssssssssseeeseerree 4 Installing the Upper P
256. rt Help List D gt A Press Zoom r Function no gt gt lt Z O 3 Press we Dl Se Lecr OK Press OKC Page Header OK 5 Press lt C Zoom or Zoom until the setting you wish to change appears on Summer Time K the display E g press Zoom E once Press K S M derOfE OK a LL ep Press lt S Zoom or Zoom to adjust T the change Mode On Ok 8 Press XC The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear RA Note o oy 5 Select OK Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Opinii to return to standby mode Function 6 5 COPYING Making a Copy Lift the platen cover Place the original face down at the arrow mark on the scale Close the platen cover Start Press to perform the copy opera tion Pk Important After copying a large number of pages wait a couple of minutes before attempting to turn off the machine H Note When printing to label paper envelopes transparencies or thin paper 60 g m or 16 lb remove each printout as it comes out of the machine If you don t printed output can fall out of the output tray and become curled Alignment of Originals Align the original with the scale of the exposure glass e When the original is a standard size such as A4 or
257. ry ssersiesseo ta n i tenn ee 21 vi PRINTING eur LI Or PADUNE secip 23 To install the printer driver under Windows 95 eeececceeeeseeeees 23 To install the printer driver under Windows 3 1X ccccccceeseees 24 New Hardware Found Window sssssessseeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeaaas 24 Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver 00008 25 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer scicccecsdcasatesscsscwvsssasieans 26 To print to the second printer actrecssitversaccuesacesenaeusasstiedsensesdvasiacies 26 COPYING Making d CODY greene tree reer ino etn ent tana renee 27 Mak mo WO ONS acresce sreehoepeqaisdesarys 28 Makne a Book COPT cic deicne set re asanegootencacesacessananencedeseneeoscctreseusencenens 29 Reduction and Enlargement ci cacinstinsensecurtsnnlerteandsciiesindiienstasornssncen 30 To set the reduction factor sosoosseesesesseeseseseeseseeeeeeereeereeseseeseees 30 To set the enlargement factor 5c ascerenccdaesscadoswssersensvreadacareedehstoeavaants 31 200m In 1 Inerem nts sicrascasecrisasecricstsetosaatorisorarianitbereenrecetaeats 32 TO ZOOM eee E E E E ER 32 Adjusting Copy IMa Esseen E 33 To select the resolution photo setting eeseoesensssssssesosssseeeeeeereeeee 33 To adjust the image density nsonnnnnneeeseessssssssssssssssssseeesseeerereseee 34 Setting an Original onto the ADF Type 2 only cceeeeeeees 35 Sorting Output Type 2 only
258. s Specify the paper size using the p 20 image are not copied not specified operation panel 84 TROUBLESHOOTING Copying and Faxing 2 2 r moneo The machine is not Check the line connection Make connected to the sure that one end of the line telephone line cable is connected to the LINE socket at the rear of the machine and the other to your telephone ine socket Cannotsend or receive 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING The Dial Mode settings are Make sure you have selected the not correct correct line ype pulse or tone If behind a PABX make sure the PABX settings are correct Cannot send faxes The machine is in copy op Press the Fax Copy key to switch p 29 eration mode to fax operation mode Cannot receive faxes The machine is Dus Fax reception is not possible processing or printinga PC while the machine is pro cessing print job or printing PC print data The machine is busy mak Fax reception is not possible i ing copies while making copies The machine has run out of Load more paper If small size p 11 paper or small size paper paper is load d load A4 size is loaded in the upper tray paper so you can receive faxes a The machine is in TEL Press the Reception Mode Key mode to switch to FAX mode or rea about how to receive faxes manually in TEL mode Paper is jammed Clear all jammed paper Top unit cover open Close all top unit The machine has been set Turn Autho
259. s blank press any key to exit Economy mode Fax i If necessary press a Q to switch to Dial Set orig fax operation mode EI Carefully insert the document stack face down into the ADF until the display changes to Dial number Make sure this message appears If it does not your document will not be scanned from the ADE 40 FAXING Adjust the scan settings if necessary E g ifyour documentis a photograph press the Original Type Select key twice to select Photo 1 Sort Tan EnOTO En OTe 1 2 Oo Z Le a Toxt Fna Photo1 Photographs Photo2 Mixed text and photographs To select the Resolution Photo setting 76 5 Dial the fax number in one of the fol 12345678_ lowing ways On the numeric keypad E g press L 25 354 5S 6 E g Press a Quick Dial key with a number stored in it Sort B XYZ CO E g press CO iB J 1B Name Press then enter the first letter of a previ ABC CO ously stored Name Dial Name E g press Q then press 25 until the Name Dial you require appears Press S DIALL et 4 oh FAXING Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers You can enter pauses and tones when dialling or store them in Quick D ial and Name D ial numbers Quick Dials see page 53 Name Dials see page 58 Entering Pauses In some situations you may need to insert a pause in fax numbers For example e If your telephone line is behin
260. s section describes how to install the paper feed unit option and how to load paper in it Addition of a paper feed unit provides you with a second paper source that holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or Letter size paper ik Important Make sure that machine power is turned off and that the power cord is unplugged from the power socket before installing the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit Part Names 1 Front guide 2 Side guide 3 Limit mark 4 Paper size indicator 5 Connector 6 Corner guides O 7 Metal plate 1 Remove all the packing tapes from the paper feed unit and pull the paper tray out of the unit 2 After removing all tapes and cardboard from inside of the paper tray insert the tray back into the machine until it locks into place Locate the paper feed unit where you plan to use the machine Note Be sure to place the paper feed unit on a level surface GETTING ACQUAINTED The machine has handhold at the loca tions shown in the illustration Note that the illustration shows the machine as viewed from above e This illustration shows the handhold lo cation on the right side of the machine e This is the handhold location on the left side of the machine 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Carefully lower the machine onto the paper feed unit making sure that the dowels on the paper feed unit fit into holes in the bottom of the machine properly A CAUTION When lifting
261. s the Q uick D ial key the number is stored in Sort Text Photo Photo Memory Copy Text Fine 1 TEI oe If you store a number in a Quick Dial you can also give it a name up to 10 characters long If you press a Quick Dial key when the display below is shown the stored name will come up on the display so you can check it Dial set orig Beye SOs You can store one fax number in each of the five Q uick D ial keys labeled A E To check the fax numbers stored in Quick Dials print out the D ial List Printing the Dial List see page 63 Oo Z a LL Name Dials see page 58 For how to dial with a Quick Dial see page 41 step 5 53 FAXING Storing Quick Dials Entering Characters on the Operation Panel see page xiv Entering Pauses and Tones in Fax Numbers see page 42 Help 1 Press Q Function 2 Press Zoom Gr EJ Press b bs 4 Press OK Q To select a Quick Dial press a Quick Dial key Sort Memory Copy E g press 2 Note To print a list of currently stored Quick Dials press Zoom r to select Quick dial 8 Start Then press 6 Enter or edit the fax number you wish to store with the numeric keypad Eg pres b 23545565 P PN 54 Prt Help List P Funct Von MO 13 Ouiek Dial 3 Press Quick or Print List P Dial LLS vine Press Start Printing 4s 12345678 98 Press OK Q Enter or edit the name for this Quick Dial B
262. smiallsize Papel six ansehen olivate aia a eal 12 Load na c 115 wily er cus Rreemnrereerea meer ar eee A 14 TOMO ACCT CODES oe satuatet tails telnet tial ashes neuashsedaneccennceuhawes 14 TO Toad mansparencie istic ace lei cee acti N eee aaa es 14 TolOad label paper ean E 14 Connecting a Second Printer Additional Printer eee 15 To Connect toa second printer ssccisaceececesctiesstrecdesesreiilasnebidaneeaatendes 15 Installing the Paper Feed Unit Option ccc ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 16 Paper Feed Unit Part Names icccccicichocctect nesatoch tases oscatbegadudiieaiuabhess 16 To mstall the Paper Feed Unit msisdereisiesicsrtesacsasnsucsaiadneniadieialiadbess 16 To load paper into the paper feed unit cc eeeeeeessseeseseeeeeeeeeeees 18 Tochanee Ihe paper SIZ6 sw iccssncs iii n E S EES 19 Tospecily the paper si Zenna Keeton a 19 To install the paper size indicator sicie 20 vi TO SelecUthe Paper SOULCE 2 siesssaucusadend a 20 UO perag ins Memory seien r E toned 21 PRINTING AND SCANNING SE 0 Denon ek eene a ore nent eenent an trct re Veer meer ures een E 25 Installing the Software Drivers a coetccies oii ak eiedie MiatncieieacatacientAsie 23 Features You Can Access From the Printer Driver 00000008 25 Using the Second Printer Additional Printer c ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 TO Print to The SECON PATE sisser woreda 26 COPYING MAKI Oa COP senne A E 27 Making Multipl
263. soft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks Copyright 1999 RICOH CO LTD Safety Information W hen using your machine the following safety precautions should always be followed Types of warnings used in this manual A WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death A CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property Symbol examples AN The A symbol means a situation that requires you take care Q The symbol means you MUST NOT carry out this operation This example means Do not take apart Z The symbol means you MUST perform this operation This example means You must remove the wall plug Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other product names used here in are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks A WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Only connect the machine to the power source descri
264. ss Q or Hel O instead of OK Q Please wait and Not Registered appear on the display e Do not carry out any operations while Registered appears on the display TECHNICAL REFERENCE Please wait Registered 100 Ok 59 l lt L Z T O Lu _ N REFERENCE TECHNICAL REFERENCE Economy Mode T he Economy mode can be selected to save power If no operation is per formed for 5 minutes the display becomes blank and all the indicators go out If no operation is performed in the next 10 minutes or 235 minutes according to the setting the heater turns off T he economy mode is on as the default setting ome off ON default setting 15 minutes including time when operation panel is off 240 minutes including time when operation panel is off Note e During the Economy Mode the heater turns back on in the following cases when any key on the operation panel is pressed when the platen cover is opened when paper is set in or removed from the upper paper tray Type 2 when the tray of the paper feed unit option is pulled out or pushed back into the machine When the top unit is opened When an original is set in or removed from the ADF On initiation of PC printing e When a key on the operation panel is pressed to turn the heater on the key does not perform its normal function e After the heater is turned back on the previous quantity and Sort On s
265. sssis aeccinnres 11 13 Specifying lower sesers 19 Paper siZe mndi eae ine 16 19 Paper Feed Uhi Pernan acces 16 PG TETA E o O T X Photo l sectetaaziiastacacecitsstetdtateuccestesosem eae eed tolet 33 PROVOZ sacar EEN 33 PIAL COVE souu N viii ix POWORSOC KE niea viii ix POWER SOE Iss 24 sooner iscsi tatntats viii ix printer driver WINDOWS 05 ANA 23 WOW ao A cece hace EET TE 24 OUa KE u a EN X RECUO oN X IRECUICLIOIY araon O 30 Replacing LONEC SCASS CU EA 32 CIC AMIS pad enesti nisni 52 resolution photo setting ccccsceseeseceesecseeases 33 Safety Informai a i Scammer LOCK n viii ix UMKIN ann enter ret ayia tied Renee 3 Second Printer Additional Printer port viii ix UE G026 66 Second Printer Additional Printer 0 0 c X COCON e S 15 UE E E E EE AEA 26 Side Ue AA ET 16 19 SINIM COVER ia tical Vili 1X a h AE EPE A E EAS TE ATOE EE A 21 Small size paper feed access panel viii ix smalls ize DADE ein esata 12 SOI EEE EE E E E T TE 31 Sort Memory Copy Type 2 only xi 28 33 SPECIFICATIONS oerein 62 BOUL E a ncapn Ma e oae inthe X LOD ATE N E A xi LOL AGE PTE EAEE E RS 55 o A T A A E E T AS 33 Toner cassette EAA AE OEE EET A 2 REDACTAT A 52 Top release lever c ssescsesssecsecssersesssenee viii ix OoN ea viii iX CASAL CICS esana ceed tists 14 TROUBLESHOOTING wovencsntecsstireiictii hues 39 Iko E errs earner A eeree te
266. t Press down on the metal plate in the bottom of the paper tray until the plate locks into place with a click Ey Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb can be inserted into the pa per tray as shown in the illustration Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the side fence FH Note Make sure the leading corners of the paper fit under the corner guides 4 Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place Of ZE FZ u S OG ig GETTING ACQUAINTED Changing the Paper Size U se the following procedure to set the positions of the paper guides inside the paper tray for either A4 or Letter paper 1 Squeezing in on both sides of the front guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size 2 Squeezing in on both sides of the side guide slide it to the correct position for the desired paper size ik Important Whenever you change the paper size be sure to also specify the paper size using the procedure below Specifying the Paper Size After you install the paper feed unit option you can select between the upper paper tray and the paper feed unit as the paper source and specify the size of paper in the paper feed unit Press Zek _ 1 QFinction Prt Help List Prt Heip rist Press Zoom FUnCtCIrON DOr aa Press 65 L 61 Tray Pap Size GETTING ACQUAINTED Lower Tray OK 4 Press O
267. t appears in one of the positions shown in the illustration to the right R Note The bits other than the one highlighted in the illustration are unrelated to this setting Help tt oad Press function Prt Help List appears _ t Help List 7 Up Press gf to change the bit setting to 1 or 0 as desired Display 02 0000 0000 Off Default 02 0000 0100 On Density will be lighter Please wait 5 Press OKC Please wait then Reg istered appears Note l Stop Registered e To cancel this change press Q or Hel Ohrinchon instead of OK Q Please wait and Not Registered appear on the display Do not turn off the machine while Please wait Registered or Not Registered is displayed 39 l lt IE O Lu H LLI O LLI co LLI LL LLI am 8 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Paper Capacity Upper tray plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 100 sheets Option paper unit plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 250 sheets Output tray Capacity plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib 50 sheets Memory 4 MB Expandable to 8 MB 16 MB or 32 MB EDO SIMM 60 ns 72 pin Dimensions 249mm x 352mm x 576mm HxWxD 9 81 x 13 87 x 22 69 HxWxD Weight 15 0 kg 33 08 1b Paper Capacity Upper tray plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 100 sheets Option paper unit plain paper 80 g m 20 1b 250 sheets ADF Auto Document Feeder Capacity
268. t Type 2 only T he following example shows how output is affected by turning sorting on and off Sort On o ik Important The sort operation requires scanning of all your originals into memory before starting the copy operation The number of originals that can be scanned at one time depends on how much memory you have installed Refer to page 21 for de tails on increasing memory capacity To turn sorting on and off 1 Set the originals on the ADE Note Refer to page 35 for how to set originals 2 Sorting is activated when the W pointer is visible on the display above Sort Memory S Sort Memory Copy l O Copy Press to select sort d Printer Memory Copy lt ing on and off no pointer Sort Memory Copy Reduce Enlarge 3 COPYING Start Ey When you press C to start the copy operation all of the originals on the ADF are scanned into memory before they are printed Note Clear Modes Press copying to clear the setting after 38 _ I Start 5 TROUBLESHOOTING General Nothing happens Power cord is not con Correctly connect the power when the machine is nected cord to the machine and plug it turned on into a outlet SIMM is not installed correctly Install the SIMM correctly SIMM does not meet the Use a SIMM with the required p 21 required specifications specifications Paper misfeeds when Paper was loaded in the Remove the paper turn the ma the machi
269. t Fine eee Use the Original Type Selectkey p 76 images to select the Photo1 or Photo2 Mode Parts of the original The correct paper size is Specify the paper size using the p 11 13 19 image are not copied not specified operation panel faxes The machine is not con Check the line connection nected to the telephone Make sure that one end of the line line cable is connected to the LINE socket at the rear of the machine and the other to your telephone line socket The Dial Mode settings are Make sure you have selected the not correct correct line type pulse or tone If behind a PABX make sure the PABX settings are cor rect 82 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 and Faxing 2 2 Cannot x faxes The machine is in copyop Press the Fax Copy key to switch p 29 eration mode to fax operation mode Cannot receive faxes The machine is busy Fax reception is not possible processing or printinga PC while the machine is processing print job or printing PC print data The machine is busy mak Fax reception is not possible ing copies while making copies The machine run outof Load more paper If small size p 11 paper or small size paper paper is loaded load A4 size is loaded in the upper tray sat SO you can receive faxes The machine is in TEL i Reception Mode a switch to FAX mode or read about how to receive faxes manually in TEL mode Paper is jammed Clear all jammed paper Front unit cover open Clos
270. t any scan settings as required Start 4 Press C and replace the handset Connecting Receiving a Fax during a Telephone Call Make sure the machine is in fax opera tion mode Start 6 Press C and replace the handset COnN H Note Fax reception is not possible while there is a document in the ADF 50 FAXING Monitoring the Line while Dialling with On Hook T his feature lets you dial a telephone number without lifting the optional external handset You can listen to what is happening on the line through the machines internal speaker If necessary press lt tox O to switch to Copy Daly Set orig fax operation mode On Hook Press PCL Q Dial number 3 Dial the telephone number using the numeric keypad a Quick Dial a Name a Dial or the Pause Redial key 4 If you hear a voice answer pick up the On Hook Dial external handset press OC again and continue your conversation gP Note Stop To cancel the call press Q 5 Replace the handset when you have fin Remote Change If you have set the reception mode to TEL mode and turn this feature on you can use the telephone handset numeric keypad to start fax reception when you hear another fax machine on the line W hen you hear a fax machine through the handset press the Remote C hange digit on the telephone handset twice to initiate fax reception then replace the handset You need to specify the Remote C hange digit usin
271. te by its han dle Pull the top release lever G and open the top unit 52 USER MAINTENANCE ED Hold the toner cassette by its handle and pull it out 2 Note Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner 6 USER MAIN TENANCE 5 5 i Remove the old cleaning pad N E3 Smeal A Note Be sure to grasp the green handle when re moving the cleaning pad p 5 Insert the new cleaning pad into place OA by grasping the green handle VAN Fe 6 Press down gently but firmly on both sides of the pad to make sure that it is inserted as far as it can go Do not forget to install the cleaning pad whenever you install a new toner cassette Prepare the new toner cassette Hold ing the toner cassette by its handle gen tly shake it side to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside a Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 7 53 USER MAINTENANCE Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step above on either side of the toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine Ff Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 10 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into pla
272. ted printout results here check the printer driver s online help for other useful information When Paper Will Not Feed If paper has completely stopped feeding check using the following proce dure 1 Remove all paper Pull the top release lever G and open the top unit EJ Pull out the toner cassette 94 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Pull the blue key shaped pawl located deep inside on the right where the toner cassette was set forward Wo l E 098 rz oH Install the toner cassette into the ma chine Close the top unit When the top unit is closed the motor will start running When the sound of the motor stops set paper in the origi nal position and continue with normal operation 95 7 USER MAINTENANCE Daily Maintenance Clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry GH Note Turn off the machine before cleaning Exposure glass 96 USER MAINTENANCE Replacing the Toner Cassette And the Cleaning Pad Printing on A4 size paper under the recommended temperature and hu midity conditions noted in the table under Environment on page 1 you can expect a toner cassette to print approximately 3 000 pages when you are printing typical business letters that have text covering 5 of the total sur face T he starter cassette that comes with the machine can print approxi mately 1 000 pages Pages that contain graphics use more toner and shorten the life of a toner cassette A WARNING Do n
273. tenscnaessuanauscianseanteatees 42 Sha fela ology TONES uupreneme peerrres Wereten er tye en Crate eee e ere sentry emt reer 42 Redialline aN UM Der ranea E 43 POMO Mane Redial viseseee asses a a a eeaetreee tee 43 Cancelling Automatic Redial c ccc ccesssseessesseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 43 Cancelling Transmission Of a Fax ccccccssssssessssessssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 R eceiv mo Faxe S enee ceisee dateeaculceeeh bul ass teadanccdhc aint cahaloat lee aeilts 45 Choosing a Reception Mode ccccccccccssssssssssssssssssessseseeeeeseeeeees 45 FAX Modelini a T aas 45 yi TEMOU l peers re petri eee eo vonotechele etree ee aeanr dee ter sean ter Vaeel erhereatene 45 Switcing between FAX Mode and TEL Mode 46 Receving calls in TEL Mode cseeeesseseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 46 Screening out Unwanted Faxes with Authorized Reception 46 Turning Authorized Reception on off 0 cccceseeeeeeeeeees 47 Cancelling Reception of a Fax ccccccccccsssssseeesssssesssssssseeeeseeeeeees 48 Makmo Telephone Call sensisse aaiatawdsaaseleuntar cause stesetecabs 49 Faxing During a Telephone Call ccccccceceeeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 49 Sending a Fax During a Telephone call cc eeeeeeeeeeee 50 Receving a Fax During a Telephone call eee 50 Monitoring the Line while Dialling with On Hook 0 51 Reno Can Ce fortis isis staan tcien tite ieee 51 Storing Fax and
274. termined that louerg ae this machine model meets the Energy Star Guide lines for energy efficiency The Energy Star Guidelines intend to establish an international energy saving system for developing and introducing energy efficient office equipment to deal with environmen tal issues such as global warning When a product meets the Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency the Partner shall place the Energy Star logo onto the machine model This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with printing equipment by means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode Low Power Mode This machine automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after the last printing job has been completed To exit Low Power mode press any key on the operation panel The machine returns to the ready condition in about 22 seconds To change the low Power delay see page 108 Specification Power consumption 15 W Low Power Mode Economy Mode Default delay Recycled paper Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled paper types that may be used in this machine Contents Sdreiy nior ma ON eseo E E EA 1 MET OY Star VL OCT AI eme E a Iv PENIG isn Ganesa fe anetassacac eae acqeusteaceasaccent osteceaaeecnoas X Operaio Pane beasna a a a a a dace dace xii 1 SETTING UP Package Contea iaa a anes l Locations esine E EE l Installing the Starter Toner Cassette
275. th the machine to connect to your computer Connect the other end of the parallel cable to your computer s parallel printer port SETTING UP Turning On the Machine A WARNING Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside of the front cover Avoid multi wiring Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cable Do not place heavy objects on it pull it hard or bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an electric shock or fire Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Fk Important When you turn on the machine for the first time after the installation make sure that no paper is loaded beforehand Attach the power cable to the machine and plug the other end into a outlet 2 Turn on the machine 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED ik Important The default display language is English For how to change to your preferred language see page 57 Paper and Other Media T he machine supports printing on the following types of paper media from the upper paper tray Refer to the following pages for details Paper Media type Paper size Page Letter 81 2 x 11 5 11 A4 210mm x 297mm A5 148mm x 210mm 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED D Q Q A H Note Do not attempt to use the following types of paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper paper containin
276. the machine make sure your hands are at the locations indicated by x in the illustration This protects against pinching your fingers between the machine and paper feed unit 2 Note After the above installation attach the power cord to the machine and plug the other end into an outlet Refer to page amp for details GETTING ACQUAINTED To load paper into the paper feed unit You can load either A4 or Letter size paper into the paper feed unit Refer to page 19 for details on how to change the positions of the paper guides inside of the tray to match the type of paper you are using 1 Pull out the paper tray and remove it from the paper feed unit Press down on the metal plate in the bottom of the paper tray until the plate locks into place with a click Ey Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or 20 lb can be inserted into the pa per tray as shown in the illustration Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the side fence Note Make sure the leading corners of the paper fit under the corner guides 4 Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place GETTING ACQUAINTED To change the paper size U se the following procedure to set the positions of the paper guides inside the paper tray for either A4 or Letter paper 1 Squeezing in on both sides of the front guide slide it to the correct position for the desir
277. their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks In accordance with ISO Standard 7001 this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch means POWER ON O means POWER OFF Copyright 1999 RICOH CO LTD INFORMATION TO THE USER USA FCC Part 15 Class B NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Crass B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be deter mined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is con nected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host
278. ting the Help List You can print out the help list While the machine is not performing any other operation press Oor The message Prt Help List appears 2 Press OKC Press Start appears Start Ey Press C to print the Help List Note Print on A4 Letter or Legal paper 54 Prt Help List on Press Start Start Q Selecting the Language TECHNICAL REFERENCE T he language for the display can be selected from the following English French Spanish Italian German Swedish 1 Press Orason Prt Help List appears 2 Press Zoom oL or Q Zoom until 2 h Language appears The messages change in the following order 1 Tray Pap Size J 3 User Param 2 Language EJ Press OKC and press Zoom 4 gt or lt zom until the desired language appears The languages change in the following order Language English Langue francais 7 Sprak svenska Idioma Espanol lL Spr Deutsch Lingua Italiano Press OKC Please wait then Reg istered appears R Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is displayed e The setting is not registered if OK Q 1S not pressed Prt Help List OK 2 Language Please wait Registered lt q Z IE O Lu H LLI O LLI co LLI LL LLI am TECHNICAL REFERENCE selecting 300 dpi or 600 dpi Set the printer to 300 dpi if the designated output is not obtained w
279. tion Stop To cancel the call press OC Replace the handset when you have fin E ished the call Dial set orig Remote Change If you have set the reception mode to TEL mode and turn this feature on you can use the telephone handset numeric keypad to start fax reception when you hear another fax machine on the line W hen you hear a fax machine through the handset press the Remote C hange digit on the telephone handset twice to initiate fax reception then replace the handset You need to specify the Remote C hange digit using when you turn this feature on with the following procedure 52 Help 1 Press Orunction 2 Press Zoom r EJ Press 3x Qs 4 Press OK Q 5 Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to turn Remote Change on or off 6 Press OK Q and do one of the follow ing Ifyou turned Remote Change on go to step gg Ifyou turned Remote Change off go to step E Press a digit on the numeric keypad to select the Remote Change digit E g press J 8 Press OK The display opposite will flash briefly on the display and then the function menu will reappear 2 Note Do not turn off the machine while Please wait or Registered is shown on the op eration panel display 9 Do one of the following Enter another function number Press QOhunchon to return to standby mode FAXING Prt Help List DP Function no 32 Remote Change Mode OPE eC Mode On xK
280. tion Note e Ifan original becomes misfed during feed St ing by the ADF press O to stop the op eration Refer to Clearing a Paper Misfeed on page 47 e We recommend you use text mode when copying with the ADF e We recommend you copy photo originals from the exposure glass for best results O riginals that do not meet the following requirements can cause paper misfeeds and even damage the machine E Requirements Thickness 0 05mm to 0 2mm 0 002 to 0 08 Weight 60 to 90 g m 161b to 24lb Clear markings Markings on the originals must be clear to be read correctly Uniform page size All pages should be the same size Page condition Avoid using originals that are bent curled damaged or stapled and originals printed on coated paper carbon paper or photographic paper COPYING sorting Output Type 2 only T he following example shows how output is affected by turning sorting on and off Sort On 5 AE ats ik Important The sort operation requires scanning of all your originals into memory before starting the copy operation The number of originals that can be scanned at one time depends on how much memory you have installed Upgrading Memory see page 21 To turn sorting on and off 1 Set the originals on the ADF l PA Note i Setting an originals on the ADF see page 35 Sorting is activated when the W pointer is visible on the display above Sort Memory S
281. tion number 60 12345678 98 Name E Name XYZ CO E Registered Register Ok FAXING Deleting Name Dials Help 1 Press O runction Prt Help List DP 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press b 14 Name Dial x 4 Press OK Q Zoom r O A Delete Select letter 5 Press OK Q Enter the first letter of the Name Dial label Many E g press 6 If Name Dial you are looking for does not ap pear keep pressing the key until it does MNO E g press Note You can also search through Name Dials that begin the same initial letter with the lt 9 Zoom and Zoom OL keys again ear CI Press Q Delete Do one of the following To delete the Name Dial press OK Q and go to step E Oo lt a LL a Deleted O A Delete i Hel l To cancel this operation press Ornon ej ther enter another function number or press TAE M to return to standby mode 6 oh FAXING Do one of the following To delete another Name Dial go to step To return to standby mode press Ohrincton twice To access another function press Oprincton once and enter another function number Dialling with Name Dials Instead of dialling the number on the numeric keypad do the following in fax operation mode How to Send a Fax see page 40 Make sure the machine is in fax operation mode Name A Press QO Enter the first letter of the Name Dial label
282. tive sheet intashsccciserdrersencunesbsswededsstieetusaidnaeaiaans 5 To install the document output tray svevsccscasitiescosnersactnnvcaceenecnceseaeceene 6 Connecting to a COMpUter eeeeeeeeesssssssssssssssssssseseettrreerrrresesssssssss 7 Tarne On ihe Macie sserssresceesc 8 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Paper aan NC Gia a EEEN 9 MG PaP iesise E oun deestentencuaeceacedies 10 To load plain paper into the upper paper tray ccecccceeeeeeeetees 10 To load small size papet cccccccccccssssccssssssssssesssesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeees 12 Loadine Other Medid eee ee eens enr ne ree rene ear a 14 MO AOAC eVel eoe EEE EE 14 To load transparencies socre aE EN 14 To load label papil srera 14 Connecting a Second Printer Additional Printer 0 0 0 eee 15 To connect to a second printer io csnccicanetiecreesitews caveat eavcabredecadeaduanes 15 Installing the Paper Feed Unit Option sssecccsscsscscccccsesacacscnveescencwerssevs 16 Paper Feed Unit Pat Names csceirsenensen sei e E 16 Toinstall the Paper Feed UMi ssersirarssimeriiioienaienie niii 16 To load paper into the paper feed unit sccsiessccsdedvessedeseseaseareesdacneondas 18 To change the paper Size sacros sonal vieubocwxshaieuseinaneeecectens 19 To specify the paper size ssc coscancusidaarconbestosvereiaseeidanssundsheveenseetonbeseons 19 To install the Paper size indicator crscccerovassscnesssedecseseaconesvivesncstaueseans 20 To select tie pap r SOURCE corporei EE T 20 aC Memo
283. to side 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside a Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle T 98 Look inside the machine and note the locations of the arrows that indicate the toner cassette guides on either side 9 Make sure the plastic pins marked with x in the illustration next to step above on either side of the toner cas sette slide along the guides inside the machine FH Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle 10 To close the top unit press down firmly but gently on both sides of it until the top unit closes and clicks securely into place FH Note Background gray cast is sometimes evident just after installing a new toner cassette USER MAINTENANCE 99 y lt 9 E wi H N USER MAINTENANCE 2 O Q D Paper Paper should always be stored properly Improperly stored paper might result in poor image reproduction creased copies or paper misfeeds G en erally avoid paper curling and absorption of moisture e Avoid storing paper in humid areas In high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity conditions store paper in a vinyl bag Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat Store on a flat surface Use older stock first Do not lay heavy objects on paper Keep open reams of paper in the package and store as you would unopened paper Toner Cassette Keep th
284. toner gets on your hands wash them im mediately Install the toner cassette into the ma chine FH Note Be sure to hold the toner cassette by its handle Keep the toner cassette horizontal to avoid spilling the toner e Refer to page 2 for details on how to in stall the toner cassette 6 Close the top unit a Note If Clear Paper is still displayed after you clear the jam there may be paper jammed in another part of the machine Check all areas described in this section ik Important If a paper misfeed occurs during a copy job be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again ow gt w V 5 TROUBLESHOOTING Clearing a Misfeed in the ADF 1 Open the ADF cover 2 lt H O O L p FH Note Be sure to open the ADF cover before pulling out the misfed original Failure to do so can result in damage to the original T l aa _ O H To 2 Pull out the misfed original Close the ADF cover and make sure it locks securely into place ik Important If copying was in progress be sure to specify the desired copy quantity again 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Pull out the misfed paper 93 TROUBLESHOOTING Ey Slide the paper tray back into the pa per feed unit until it locks into place Note For how to set paper in the optional paper feed unit see page 19 0 Tip If you cannot find a remedy for unexpec
285. unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size Press OK Tray guide OK OK E After pressing OK press Zoom or Zoom until the desired size appears Dita X 81 27 gt When the correct paper size is on the display press K oe F Note egistered Do not carry out any operations while Reg istered appears on the display 2 GETTING fa LLI F Z lt O O lt SE Tip T If the paper feed unit option is not t TextFine Photo Photo2 installed you can press vor in O place of Qhinclon in step Next Enlarge Paper Select skip step 9 and and jump directly to step H Ai Note e Be sure to specify the paper size before printing on A4 or Letter paper again GETTING ACQUAINTED Loading Other Media U sethe following procedures to load envelopes transparencies and label paper Kom exe fo M 19 0 01 1 Load up to 5 envelopes at a time using the same procedure for loading small size paper on page 12 e Insert envelopes print side up with the stamp position as shown e Envelope flaps should be securely folded down so the envelope is closed This is especially important when printing on envelopes with adhesive on the flaps because heat generated during the printing process can cause the adhe sive to melt and get on rollers H Note Refer to the paper select operation on page 14 To load trans
286. unplug the power cord with your hands wet Otherwise an electric shock might occur Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do notremove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an elec tric shock Also reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage When the machine needs to be checked adjusted or repaired contact your service representative Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine There is a risk of fire electric shock explosion or loss of sight If the machine looks damaged or breaks down smoke is coming out there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual immediately turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall Do not continue using the machine in this condition Contact your service representative If metal liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord Contact your service representative Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flower pots glasses on the machine If the contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur Do not incinerate used toner or toner cassettes Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open
287. ure that all of the items shown in the Package C ontents sheet that comes with the machine are included A WARNING o Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water e g vases flowerpots glasses on the machine Ifthe contents fall inside the machine a fire or electric shock could occur 1 SETTING UP A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust A fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface Ifit topples over it could cause injury o If you use the machine in a confined space make sure there is a continuous air turnover Location Environment OO J on O o 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F e The machine must be level within 3mm 0 11 both front to rear and left to right Locations to Avoid e Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light more than 2000 lux e Areas exposed to cool or heated air from air conditioners heaters etc Sudden tem perature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine e Areas where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration e Areas higher than 2500m 8 221 feet above sea level Machine Clearance Place the machine near the wall outlet providing minimum clearance as shown Min 180mm 7 09 SETTING UP Installing the Start
288. will not be received Receiving Calls in TEL Mode see page 46 g Z a LL 45 FAXING Switching between FAX Mode and TEL Mode Press the Reception Mode key to switch between FAX mode and TEL mode xt Photo Photo TEL FAX ne ee Receiving calls in TEL Mode W hen the machine is switched to TEL mode follow these steps to answer incoming calls oe pees When the machine rings press 7 Q Telephone call or lift the handset and listen If you hear a voice and you lifted the habdset continue the conversation as normal and replace the handset when finished Ifyou hear another fax machine make sure the machine is in fax operation mode press Fax Copy if necessary then go to step 2 Start Press C and replace the handset The machine will start receiving the message screening out Unwanted Faxes with Authorized Reception T his feature lets you screen out unwanted incoming fax messages In this manual the fax number of another machine which you wish to allow to send you fax messages is referred to as a Specified Sender W hen Authorized Reception is turned on your machine will only receive fax messages from Specified Senders all other incoming messages will be rejected and not printed 46 FAXING W hen a fax message comes in the machine checks to see if the sender s fax number is stored in any of the Q uick D ials or Name D ials If it is found and you have used that Q uick D ial
289. wiss 742 Condensed Bold SWC Swiss 742 Condensed Bold Italic SWC Incised 901 SWC Incised 901 Italic SWC Incised 901 Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Roman SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 810 Courier Bold Italic SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Bold 12 pitch text SWC Fixed Pitch 850 Letter Gothic Italic 12 pitch text SWC Flareserif 821 SWC Flareserif 821 Extra Bold SWC Ribbon 131 SWC Wingbats SWM Grey scale 256 levels 8 bit Interface IEEE 1284 ECP mode Compatibility TWAIN ADF Up to 10 pages of 80g m 201b Plain paper Maximum scanning size 212 x 351 6 mm OS Windws 95 98 only 107 lt O O LLI QO O o TIONS SPECIFICATIONS Copying Specifications Copy Speed 6 cpm copies per minute Warm up Time 30 seconds or less First copy 17 seconds or less Mulitiple Copies Up to 99 copies Copy Reduction and Enlargement 90 71 82 87 93 115 122 141 200 Paper Media Types Plain paper Envelopes Transparencies Label paper Fax Specifications Modem Speed 14400 bps Protocol ITU Group 3 Compression Method MH MR MMR 108 Paper Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 lb Original Types Exposure glass Sheet Book ADF Up to 10 pages of 80g m 201b Plain paper Maximum Original Size Legal LG 8 1 2 x 14
290. with an 8M B 16M B or 32MB SIMM U se the following procedure to install 8MB 16M B or 32MB SIMM Note The following are the required specifications for a SIMM used with this machine 72 pin 60ns Extend Date Out EDO parity non parity ik Important Make sure you touch some grounded metal object with your hand to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body before handling the SIMM 1 Turn off the machine 2 GETTING ACQUAINTED Remove the SIMM cover located on the left side of the machine RF Pull apart the hooks on the both sides of the SIMM board that hold it in place 21 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 Carefully lift out the SIMM board cur rently installed on your printer 5 Angle the new SIMM board as shown in the illustration and insert it down into the slot Gently rock it back and forth until you hear it snap into place ik Important Make sure the SIMM board is oriented cor rectly when you insert it into the slot Make sure the hooks on the sides of the SIMM board snap securely into place Replace the cover by inserting its tabs into the holes provided as shown in the illustration 22 3 PRINTING Setting Up For Printing In order to use the machine as a printer you must install
291. y Registered Do one of the following Enter another function number Press Oprincton to return to standby mode setting the Dial Mode Specify the type of telephone line you are using tone or pulse dial If you are unsure of what this should be please consult your line provider If your machine is behind a PABX you should also provide the following details e The PABX number that gives you an outside dial tone You can enter 0 or a value between 01 and 99 00 is not possible e The PSTN access method This will depend on your locale and the PABX system you are using T he machine will not function correctly if these settings are not correct Consult your systems administrator if you are unsure Help Press ae 1 Ohuncton Prt Help List 2 Press Zoom r Function no Press 25 12 Dial Mode a OK 4 Press Mode Tone me Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom OL to select Pulse or Tone Mode Pulse oe 34 Press OK Q Ifthe display opposite does not appear press to finish Press lt 9 Zoom OF Zoom oL to select whether your fax machine is behind a PABX Press OK Q If you chose No in step gg proceed to step 125 Ifyou chose Yes proceed to step EJ 9 Enter the digit or digits that give you an outside dial tone on the numeric keypad e g enter 0 You can enter 0 or a value between 01 and 99 00 is not possible H Note When changing an existing s
292. y Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide 4 Squeeze the tray guide and slide it against the edge of the stack GETTING ACQUAINTED Press 7 2 __ Prt Help List appears 5 Q Fonction p PP Prt Help List Press ZoomG or zom until 1 Tray Pap Size appears E 1 Tray Pap Size 7 3 User Param 2 Language Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size Press OKC Tray guide OK appears 1 Tray Pap Size gt Tray guide OK OK 6 a Ze eZ After pressing OK press Zoom F lt ore 5 or lt 9 Zoom until the desired size ap OG pears The sizes change in the follow ag ing order A4 ADD 8l 4x 13 N N Legal 81 2x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 N 8 x 101 2 81 2 x 13 81 2 x 51 2 When the correct paper size is on the display press OK Q Registered ap pears If the paper feed unit option page 17 is installed you can also se lect its paper size at this time E Tip If the paper feed unit option is not Paper Select in e Registered D HS J vy t JextFine Photo Photo2 O installed you can press Enlarge Paper Select place of Ohneton in step Eq Next skip step 9 and gg and jump directly to step H GETTING ACQUAINTED To load small size paper Note We recommend that you always feed small si
293. ze paper vertically with one of its shorter edges feeding into the machine 1 Remove all paper before loading small size paper in the upper paper tray Open the small panel on the back of the machine by unlatching it as shown in the illustration Opening the small panel makes it easy to handle small size paper Ey Set paper into the upper paper tray Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the tray guide 4 After setting the paper into the tray raise the small panel until it snaps securely into place GETTING ACQUAINTED Helo tt hl 5 Press Ohinetion Prt Help List appears Prt Help List 6 Press Zoom or lt Q zm until i eee a Stee 1 Tray Pap Size appears D Tray Pap Size J 3 User Param 2 Language Note If the paper feed unit option is installed refer to page 19 for details on how to specify the paper size Press OKC Tray guide OK appears Tray guide OK OK 8 After pressing OK press Zoom ad cf A5 D or lt zoom until the desired size ap pears The sizes change in the follow ing order ADD C3 Env N DLEnv Co Env 2 GETTING OQ Lu H lt _ O lt When the correct paper size is on the display press OK Registered ap R 97St ere pears Q Tip E t TextFine Photol Photo2 If the paper feed unit option is not aes installed you can press

Ricoh BIZWORKS 106 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents